Control Valve Actuators

SAMSON AG MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK Weismllerstrae 3 60314 Frankfurt am Main Germany
Phone: +49 69 4009-0 Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 E-mail: samson@samson.de Internet: www.samson.de
Table of contents
9. Control valve actuators
9.1 General ..............................................................................................................001
9.1.1. Actuator types .............................................................................................001
9.1.2. Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators ......................................002
9.2 Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement ............................005
9.2.1. Pneumatic diaphragm actuator ...................................................................005
9.2.1.1 Forces in valve and actuator ..........................................................007
9.2.2. Lay-out of a suitable valve actuator ............................................................ 010
9.2.3. Required actuator thrust for globe valves ................................................... 011
9.2.4. Dynamic forces need to be considered in case of flow to close tendencies
................................................................................................................... 013
9.2.5. Calculation and selection of an actuator ..................................................... 019
9.2.5.1 General notes for the calculation and selection of actuators ......... 019
9.2.6. Fail-safe action .......................................................................................... 021
9.2.6.1 Major application cases .................................................................022
9.2.6.2 Flow force ......................................................................................022
9.2.6.3 Sealing, friction and other forces ................................................... 024
9.2.6.4 Actuator force F
a
in all cases of (a) to (f) Chapter 9.2.6.1 .............. 025
9.2.6.5 Safety factors to actuator sizing .................................................. 028
9.2.6.6 Calculation examples (pressure balance): ....................................029
9.2.6.7 Calculation of the Hysteresis: ........................................................ 032
9.2.6.8 Required actuator torque for rotary valves .................................... 032
9.2.6.9 Actuator torque for standard butterfly valves .................................033
9.2.7. The main group of the pneumatic diaphragm linear actuators ....................036
9.2.8. Technical data for Packing and Plug stem diameter ..................................038
Table of contents
9.2.9. Technical data for additional handwheel .....................................................038
9.2.10. Mechanically adjustable bidirectional travel stop .......................................039
9.2.11. Manual operation ......................................................................................040
9.2.11.1 Pneumatic actuator Type 3277 with handwheel ............................ 041
9.2.11.2 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 with side-mounted ...............043
9.2.11.3 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 attached to Type 3241 Valve 044
9.2.12. Actuator Selection with AC-Trim ................................................................045
9.2.13. Control valves in case of fire .....................................................................046
9.2.13.1 Safety cartridge ............................................................................ 047
9.2.13.2 Fire-Safe / Fire lock .....................................................................049
9.2.13.3 Simulation of a fire .......................................................................050
9.2.13.4 Reversible operating direction ...................................................... 051
9.2.13.5 Summary .....................................................................................052
9.2.14. Overview of actuators Type 3271-52, 3271-5, and 3277-5 up to a diaphragm
area 120 cm
2
. ............................................................................................053
9.2.15. Overview of actuators Type 3271 up to a diaphragm area 1000 cm
2
. .......060
9.2.16. Overview of the actuators of 1400 cm
2
up to a diaphragm area 2 x 2800
cm
2
. ...........................................................................................................066
2
. ...... 070
9.2.18. Overview of Actuators Type 3371, 3372, Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2 .. 077
9.2.19. Actuators Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2 ................................................. 078
9.2.20. Pneumatic Actuators Type 3371 and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372
................................................................................................................... 081
9.2.20.1 Technical data Pressures in psi and bar ....................................083
9.2.21. The cost-efficient positioner Type 3725 ....................................................084
9.2.22. Operating travels for fail-safe action .........................................................085
Table of contents
9.2.22.1 Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS ...............086
9.2.22.2 Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS ............092
9.2.23. Pneumatic piston actuator ........................................................................097
9.2.24. Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275 ......................................................097
9.2.25. Principle of operation ................................................................................098
9.2.26. Mounting Servovalve actuators on SAMSON Series 3240 and 3250 Valves
...................................................................................................................100
9.2.26.1 PD Pneumatic linear actuator ..................................................... 100
9.2.26.2 Double Acting .............................................................................. 101
9.2.26.3 Double Acting with Handwheel .................................................... 101
9.2.26.4 Double Acting with Manual Gear ................................................. 102
9.2.26.5 Double Acting with Manual Hydraulic Pump ................................ 102
9.2.27. Rack and pinion pneumatic actuator ......................................................... 108
9.2.27.1 AIR TORQUE delivery program ................................................... 109
9.2.27.2 Design ..........................................................................................111
9.2.27.3 Construction .................................................................................111
9.2.27.4 Range of Options, ........................................................................ 113
9.2.27.5 Quality Manufacturing .................................................................. 113
9.2.27.6 Accessories available .................................................................. 113
9.2.27.7 Multi-function indicator ................................................................. 114
9.2.27.8 Operating conditions .................................................................... 116
9.2.27.9 Operating function and direction of rotation ................................. 117
9.2.27.10 Torque diagram Double Acting actuators ................................... 118
9.2.27.11 Spring Return Actuator ............................................................... 118
9.2.27.12 Air Torque Actuator Sizing ......................................................... 121
Table of contents
9.2.27.13 Sizing information ....................................................................... 122
9.2.27.14 4th Generation pneumatic actuator ............................................ 124
9.2.27.15 Pneumatic actuator Model AT 051 ............................................. 125
9.2.27.17 Pneumatic actuator Model AT 201 .............................................. 127
9.2.27.18 Pneumatic actuator Model AT 251 .............................................. 128
9.2.27.29 Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator ......................... 139
9.2.27.30 Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator ......................... 140
9.2.27.31 Full compliance with worldwide specifications ........................... 141
9.2.27.32 Company Approvals ................................................................. 143
9.2.28. Rotary Actuator Type 3278 ...................................................................... 144
9.2.29. Pneumatic actuators of company Pfeiffer-Armaturen GmbH .................... 146
9.2.29.1 Multi - Turn Actuator - Pfeiffer Type BR 30a ............................... 147
9.2.29.2 Additional equipment and add-on pieces: ................................... 148
9.2.29.3 Pfeiffer AT - Quarter-Turn Actuator Series BR31a ....................... 149
Table of contents
9.2.29.4 Additional equipment and add-on pieces: ................................... 150
9.2.29.5 Safety position: ............................................................................ 150
9.2.29.6 Air drive torque ............................................................................ 151
9.2.30. Pneumatic actuators of company VETEC Ventiltechnik GmbH ................ 152
9.2.30.1 Diaphragm or rotary actuators ..................................................... 153
9.2.30.2 Direction of flow, Actuator action, and Fail-safe position: ............ 155
9.2.31. VETEC Actuator Type R (rolling diaphragm or rotary actuator) ................ 156
9.2.31.1 Principle of operation: .................................................................. 158
9.2.32. VETEC Actuator Type AT (Rack and Piston actuator) .............................. 160
9.2.32.1 Principle of operation ................................................................... 162
9.2.33. New design features ................................................................................. 165
9.2.33.1 Vetec Type 62.7 AT short pattern with flanges ............................. 165
9.2.33.2 Vetec Type 82.7 R short pattern with flanges .............................. 165
9.2.34. VETEC Actuator Type MN (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ........................ 166
9.2.35. VETEC Actuator Type MD (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ........................ 168
9.2.36. VETEC Actuator Type MZ (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ........................ 171
9.2.37. VETEC Actuator Type S (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ........................... 174
9.3 Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators ......................177
9.3.1. Symmetrical scotch-yoke ............................................................................ 179
9.3.2. Canted scotch-yoke .................................................................................... 179
9.3.3. Scotch Yoke ................................................................................................ 180
Table of contents
9.3.4. Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators ............................................................. 181
9.3.5. Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators ............................................................. 182
9.3.5.1 Applications ................................................................................... 183
9.4 Electric with a linear or rotational movement ................................................184
9.4.1. Electro-mechanical Actuators ..................................................................... 184
9.4.2. Electro-mechanical and electro-hydraulic actuator ..................................... 186
9.4.2.1 Electric Actuator Type 5857 ........................................................... 188
9.4.2.2 Accessories for version with digital positioner ............................... 189
9.4.2.3 Additional electrical equipment ...................................................... 190
9.4.2.4 Electrical connection ..................................................................... 192
9.4.3. Controller with Electric Actuator Type 5757 ................................................ 193
9.4.3.1 Application ..................................................................................... 194
9.4.4. Electric Actuator Type 5724 and Type 5725 ............................................... 196
9.4.4.1 Type 5724 ...................................................................................... 197
9.4.4.2 Type 5725 ...................................................................................... 197
9.4.4.3 Examples of electrical actuator Type 5824/5825 with various control
valves ............................................................................................. 199
9.4.5. Electro-hydraulic actuator ...........................................................................200
9.4.6. Electrohydraulic Actuators Types 3274-11 to -23 ........................................203
9.4.7. Electric Actuator Type 3374 .........................................................................209
9.4.7.1 Principle of operation ...................................................................... 211
9.4.7.2 Fail-safe action .............................................................................. 211
9.4.8. Electric Actuator Type 3375 ........................................................................ 214
9.4.9. Electro-mechanical Actuators - PSL Overview ........................................... 216
9.4.9.1 PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators ................................................ 219
Table of contents
9.4.9.2 PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators ................................................ 221
9.4.9.3 Optional Accessories ..................................................................... 224
9.4.9.4 Mounting the PSL Actuator onto the Valves SAMSON Series 3240,
3250, and 3280. .............................................................................225
9.4.9.5 Type of limit cut-off ........................................................................225
9.4.9.6 Force/stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off ...................................226
9.4.9.7 Stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off .............................................227
9.4.9.8 Electric Supply ............................................................................... 228
9.4.9.9 Wiring diagram ..............................................................................228
9.4.9.10 Maximum thermal switch loading .................................................229
9.4.10. Electric actuators outside source ..............................................................230
9.4.10.1 Linear Actuator Type SAM ............................................................ 232
9.4.10.2 Principle of operation ...................................................................233
9.4.10.3 Electrical connection ....................................................................235
9.4.11. Electronic actuators of Company AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG ............236
9.4.11.1 Multi-turn actuators SAR 07.2 to SAR 30.2 .................................. 237
9.4.11.2 Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators ......239
9.4.11.3 Range of application ..................................................................... 240
9.4.11.4 Mounting to valve ......................................................................... 242
9.4.11.5 Actuators without integral controls (AUMA NORM) ...................... 245
9.4.11.6 Actuators with integral controls ..................................................... 245
9.4.11.7 AUMA MATIC AM ......................................................................... 245
9.4.11.8 AUMATIC AC ............................................................................... 246
9.4.11.9 Electric rotary-type actuator for control service (AUMA RIESTER
KG) ................................................................................................ 247
9.4.11.10 Electric rotary-type actuator for control service .......................... 249
Table of contents
9.4.11.11 Standard version .........................................................................250
9.4.11.12 Accessories ................................................................................ 250
9.4.11.13 Motor ........................................................................................... 251
9.4.11.14 AUMA MATIC .............................................................................254
9.4.11.15 Wiring diagram AM4R AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1 ..............258
9.5 Explosion-protected actuator ..........................................................................259
9.5.1. What is an explosion? ................................................................................. 259
9.5.2. What is explosion protection? .....................................................................259
9.5.3. ATEX Directive 94/9/EC .............................................................................259
9.5.4. Classification of potentially explosive atmospheres ....................................260
9.5.5. Zone/equipment category ...........................................................................260
9.5.6. Explosion group/temperature class ............................................................ 261
9.5.7. How to achieve explosion protection? .........................................................263
9.5.7.1 Increased safety (EEx e) ................................................................263
9.5.7.2 Flameproof enclosure (EEx d) .......................................................263
9.5.7.3 Constructional safety (c) ................................................................264
9.5.7.4 Who tests what? ............................................................................264
9.5.7.5 Auma Marking ................................................................................265
9.5.7.6 Electric actuators and non-electrical explosion protection .............266
9.5.8. Explosion-protected actuator ......................................................................269
9.5.8.1 Explosion-protected actuator from Company SCHISCHEK ........... 270
9.5.8.2 Accessories and special designs (additional price) ....................... 272
9.5.8.3 Ex-d valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Type ExRun ................................................................................... 273
9.5.8.4 Ex-n valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Type RedRun ................................................................................. 274
Table of contents
9.5.8.5 Wiring diagram of Type ExRun ...................................................... 276
9.5.9. Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve with explosion-proof electric actuator ............. 278
9.6 Hydraulic with a linear movement ...................................................................279
9.6.1. Hydraulic Scotch Yoke Valve Actuators .......................................................280
9.6.1.1 Reliability by Design ....................................................................... 281
9.6.1.2 Safety by Design ............................................................................ 281
9.6.1.3 High Performance by Design ......................................................... 281
9.6.1.4 Override Options ............................................................................ 281
9.6.1.5 Key Design Features ...................................................................... 282
9.6.1.6 VETEC Rotary valve with Pleiger hydraulic actuator ......................283
9.6.2. Hydraulic- actuating systems of Welland & Tuxhorn AG .............................284
9.6.2.1 Functions .......................................................................................285
9.6.2.2 Design ...........................................................................................286
9.6.2.3 Setup of an electro-hydraulic Control Loop ...................................286
9.6.2.4 Hydraulic Servo-Systems - Establishment and Manufacturing ......288
9.7 Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7 ......................289
9.8 Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1 .........290
General Page 001 of 292
9. Control valve actuators
9.1 General
The control effectiveness of a control loop is unquestionable determined by the weakest
element of the chain. This is often the valve actuator. If one presupposes a continuity of
the control valve characteristic i.e. an inherent characteristic curve without turning points,
the quality of the actuator is, for an attainable control effectiveness, in most cases, more
important than the quality of the valve characteristic curve.
The following chapter illustrates the different actuator principles, explains the authoritative
parameters for an actuator selection and focuses above all on the calculation of the required
actuator thrust and the selection of a suitable actuator type. A purely static or quasi static
consideration however is not sufficient to describe the complicated interactions between
the control valve and the actuator. Rather dynamic forces must also be considered for
critical applications. Unfortunately, there are no obligatory references available in the
corresponding literature which will permit a generalization and a simple calculation method
with regard to dynamic forces. Therefore the given recommendations are based on the
calculation of the SAMSON group experts, their valve sizing software and the authors.
The majority of all industrial control valves installed worldwide is even today still driven by
pneumatic diaphragm actuators. This actuator type is therefore of course in the center of
interest and attention.
9.1.1. Actuator types
A first criterion in the distinguishing of different actuator types is the style and the
manner in which the actuator thrust is generated. Here the user can select from the
following actuating principles:
Actuator
Pneumatic
with a linear or rotational
movement
Diaphragm
Piston
Rack & Pinion
Scotch Yoke
Scotch Yoke
Electric
with a linear or rotational
movement
Hydraulic
with a linear movement
Electro-mechanical
Electro-hydraulic
Figure 9.1.1.-1: Actuator types
Chapter 9. Control valve actuators Page 002 of 292
9.1.2. Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators
Symbol Meaning Source Unit
A Required (effective) diaphragm area SVS cm
2
c Actuator stem sealing force and other forces SVS -
C
S
Spring stiffness = A(p
st100
- p
st0
) H/H
nom.
SVS
D
a
Pressure balance cylinder diameter SVS mm
d
sd
Shaft diameter of rotary valve - mm
f FTC correction factor of fluid force F
p
(open)
f
1
Friction coefficient dependent on stem seal SVS N/mm
f
2
Coefficient depended on required seat sealing Class SVS N/mm
f
3
Friction coefficient for pressure balanced plugs SVS N/mm
F
a
Effective actuator force (thrust) SVS N
F
B
Bellows elastic force SVS N
F
f
F
f
= p
st0
= pre-load spring trust SVS N
F
a
/F
o
Minimum safety value, Close safety factor SVS -
F
S
/F
w
Open safety factor (SAMSON sizing F
f
= F
S
) SVS -
F
M
Force due to weight, force due to acceleration) SVS N
F
m
Required actuator force (thrust) pressure balanced. SVS N
F
max.
Actuator trust: Max. allowed trust depends to max.
temperature
F
mreq.
Required actuator thrust
F
mrequ.
= F
p1
+F
SF
+F
R
+F
RB
+F
M
SVS N
F
oreq.
Required actuator trust SVS N
F
o
Required actuator force (thrust). SVS N
F
P
Pressure force (P
st

A) SVS N
F
p1
Flow (fluid) forces pressure balance f(p
1
)
F
p1
= / 4 S
d
2
SVS N
F
R
Friction force caused by stuffing box (packing)
F
R
= f
1

S
d
SVS N
F
Ra
Friction force (negligible in diaphragm actuator) SVS N
F
RB
Friction force (pressure balance sealing force)
F
RB
= f
3
D
a
SVS N
F
S
Spring pre-load trust F
S
= p
st0
A SVS N
F
SE
Spring force (elastic)
Air to open: F
SE
= F
S
+ C
S
H
Air to close: F
SE
= F
S
+ C
S
(H
nom.
H)
SVS N
F
SF
Sealing force (seat loading force) when valve closed;
F
SF
= (f
2
S
b
)
SVS N
General Page 003 of 292
F
p
Flow (fluid) forces SVS N
F
w
Total friction force of valve and actuator system
F
w
= F
R
+c
F
w
= F
R
+F
RB
+c in case of pressure balance
SVS N
g Gravity acceleration g = 9.81 m/s
2
m/s
2
H
nom.
Rated (nominal) travel SVS mm
H Actual travel SVS mm
h
Relative travel = H/H
nom.
60534-1 -
Relative travel = H/H
nom.
100 60534-9
%
M Mass of plug and actuator stem system
M
A
Actuator torque SVS Nm
M
dyn
Dynamic torque SVS Nm
M
L
Bearing friction torque SVS Nm
M
St
Shaft sealing torque SVS Nm
pA
Specified shut down pressure for actuator sizing:
take care to the required seat leakage rate and valve
strength parameter
bar
p
Pressure differential p
1
- p
2
bar
p0
Pressure differential at 0 % flow or near to min. flow bar
p100
Pressure differential at 100 % flow or near to max. flow
p
1max
Allowed p depends to the chosen actuator and
strength of the stem with pressure balance
( )
a SF RB
1max.
2
d
F F F c
p
S
10 4
SVS bar
pmax
Allowed p depends to the chosen actuator and
strength of the stem
pmax
on plug calculation max. force see also
pA
pmax
>
pA
>
p0
without pressure balance
( )
a SF R
pmax.
2
b
F F F c
S
10 4
SVS bar
p
s
Min. required air supply p
st100
for fail safe ATC SVS bar
p
st
Signal pressure SVS barg
p
su
Supply pressure SVS barg
p
st0
Lower value: spring range SVS barg
p
st100
Upper value: spring range SVS barg
p
s0req.
Min. required pre-load spring force p
st0
for fail safe ATO SVS barg
S
b
Seat bore diameter SVS mm
q
vmax.
Operation condition m
3
/h
q
vmin.
Operation condition m
3
/h
S
d
Stem diameter SVS mm
S
0
Spring trust / torque characteristic
(assumed linear)
N / Nm
SB Actuator trust F
a
= p
st
A to travel from 0 to 100 % N
Sz Fluid closing force {f (p characteristic)} N
SB 1 Required torque M
A
= p
st
A (to open rotary valve) N
SB 2 Required torque M
A
= p
st
A (to close rotary valve) N
SF Safety factor SVS -
S stat. Break-off and friction torque () f(p characteristic) N
S dyn.
Dynamic torque with closing tendency (-)
f(p characteristic)
Valve-Actuator opening and closing time (See Chapter 20)
acc Index for actuator accessories -
p
a
Atmospheric pressure SVS bar
p
NV
Supply network pressure SVS barg
t Stroking time of pneumatic actuator SVS s
t
o1
, t
o2
,
t
o3
Opening times: for valve opening SVS s
t
o1
, t
o2
,
t
o3
Closing times: for valve closing SVS s
T
1
Inlet temperature K
T
A
Temperature in actuator internal volumes SVS K
V
A
Actuator internal volume, (diaphragm chamber, filled
with air)
SVS m
3
Actuator internal volume differential quotient SVS m
3
d/dt
V
0
Dead volume f(A) SVS m
3
Table 9.1.2.-1: Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators
AV
V
Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement Page 005 of 292

9.2 Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement
The majority of final control elements in the classical process industries are still today
controlled by pneumatic actuators. Either continuously regulated or activated according
to a desired On-Off service, i.e. simply driven into one of the two possible end positions.
Pneumatic actuators can be divided into two main categories:
Pneumatic diaphragm actuators
Pneumatic piston actuators
9.2.1. Pneumatic diaphragm actuator
The biggest percentage of all control valves installed worldwide in process industries are
activated by pneumatic diaphragm actuators. This actuator type essentially consists of
two metal shells (the diaphragm housing), the actuator stem and the diaphragm plate.
The actuator thrust is transmitted via the high-strength, fabric-inserted diaphragm and the
diaphragm plate onto the actuator stem (Figure 9.2.1.1.-1 and Figure 9.2.1.-2).
Unlike a piston actuator, whose travel depends on the length of the cylinder and the
piston-rod, the travel of the pneumatic diaphragm actuator is limited by the shape of
the case and the diaphragm. Within a limited travel range, the diaphragm area remains
almost constant.
High flexibility of the diaphragm ensures a minimum friction and hysteresis. These qualities
predestine the pneumatic diaphragm actuator particularly for control tasks where a high
actuator thrust, a good sensitivity and low supply pressures (2.5 to 4.0 bar) are important.
Pneumatic diaphragm actuators are usually designed for maximum
supply pressures of approximately 6.0 bar.
If one were to increase the supply pressure at room temperature, up to the destruction
of the actuator, it would work out that, in most cases, the diaphragm would prove to be
by no means the weakest part of the actuator. Rather, the actuator housing and the
supporting diaphragm plates would normally deform beyond the permissible range before
we reached a rupture of the strong diaphragm.
Temperature limits for Diaphragm actuator
Diaphragm area
Diaphragm material:
NBR
Diaphragm material:
EPDM
80 to 120 cm
2
- 35** to + 90 C On request
240 to 700 cm
2
- 35** to + 90 C - 50 to + 120 C
1400 to 2800 cm
2
- 40** to + 90 C On request
** In on/off service, the lowest value for the NBR diaphragm increases to -20 C.
Table 9.2.1.-1: Temperature limits for Diaphragm actuator
There are some reasons to limit the air supply at values < 6 bar to avoid over-stressing
of actuator parts and also the valve trim-stem system
On-off operations at higher frequencies
In case of travel stops or other accessories, not designed for 6 bar
Larger actuators with fail safe ATC need to be handled with care regarding too high
closing trust: F
a
= A (p
su
- p
st100
).
Supply pressure regulators (mass production) or supply service units are
responsible to limit the max. actuator trust to avoid mechanical damage.
If this relatively inexpensive devices are responsible for the safety function of high end
special valves (like compressor anti surge valves to protect expensive flow machines)
long term reliability must be guaranteed. If at some locations commissioning, proper
maintenance and instrumentation air quality cannot be guaranteed such dirt and oil
sensitive pressure reduction equipment should be avoided. In case of too high air
supply the actuator can be sized with spring bench rates which reduce the closing trust
of the ATC application, e.g. spring bench rate 0.8 to 2.4 bar or 1.6 to 3.2 bar.
SAMSON AG developed worldwide the first actuator with parallel spring
design which seems to be the state-of-the-art on long term.
The SAMSON Types 3271 and 3277 Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm
and internal springs. A maximum of 30 springs can be installed, partly fitted inside one
another.
Special features
Low overall height
Powerful thrust at high response
speed
Low friction
Various bench ranges by varying
the number of springs or their
compression
No special tools required to
change the bench range and to
reverse the actuator action (also
version with handwheel)
Permissible operating
temperatures from 50 to +120 C
Direct attachment of accessories
on additional yoke for
Figure 9.2.1.-2: SAMSON Type 3277 for integral positioner attachment
9.2.1.1 Forces in valve and actuator
F
p
F
Ra
F
SE
F
a
F
R
F
p
F
SF
F
M
Figure 9.2.1.1.-1: Valve Type 3241 with pneumatic actuator Type 3271
The following forces act upon the throttle trim including the plug stem:
Actuator force: F
a
(or actuator torque M
a
)
Friction force: F
R
(stem seal, possibly pressure balance seal)
Inertial force: F
M
(force due to weight of plug, force due to acceleration)
Flow force: F
p
(due to the shut-off pressure)
Sealing force: F
SF
(seat loading force) when valve is closed)
Residual forces are present on the actuator stem in the pneumatic actuator:
Actuator force: F
a
(or actuator torque M
a
)
Friction force: F
Ra
(negligible (0) however)
Inertial force: F
M
(force due to weight, force due to acceleration)
Elastic force: F
SE
(due to the springs elasticity)
Pressure force: F
P
(F
p
= P
st
A) (signal pressure p
st
, diaphragm area A)
5 1.1 1 6 6.1
3
8
12
12.1
11
10
12.1
13
2
15
16
4
7
a
9
1 Nut
1.1 Nut
2 Actuator stem
3 Vent plug
4 Loading pressure
connection
5 Top diaphragm
case
6 Springs
7 Diaphragm plate
8 Diaphragm
9 Nuts and bolts
10 Yoke with bottom
diaphragm case
11 Loading pressure
connection
12 Stem seal
12.1Dry bearing
13 Wiper
15 Ring nut
16 Stem connector
Dimension a
350 cm = 209 mm
700 cm = 246 mm
Spring pressure
Signal pressure p
st
Travel
Figure 9.2.1.-2: Sectional diagram of Type 3277 with 240, 350, and 700 cm
2
effective diaphragm area
The Type 3277 pneumatic actuators with an effective diaphragm area of 240, 350 or 700
cm
2
are primarily mounted to control valves from the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280.
The actuator is made up of two diaphragm cases, a rolling diaphragm and springs. The
lower diaphragm case is permanently fixed to the yoke which allows the direct attachment
of either a pneumatic or electropneumatic positioner or a limit switch.
The signal pressure creates a force at the diaphragm surface which is balanced by
the springs (6) arranged in the actuator. The number of springs and their compression
determine the bench range (signal pressure range) while taking the rated travel into
account which is directly proportional to the signal pressure.
A maximum of 30 springs can be installed, partly fitted inside one another. The stem
connector (16) connects the actuator stem (2) with the plug stem of the control valve.
The self contained, spring-opposed pressure governor which was introduced decades ago
and initiated the beginning of automation in process industries was the real predecessor
of the contemporary pneumatic diaphragm actuator. Modern pneumatic diaphragm
actuators developed from them over the course of the years. An essential break through
happened with the introduction of high-strength fabrics of polyamide or polyester and
oil and wear & tear resistant synthetic rubber. Both materials make a firm bonding via a
specific vulcanization process and this guarantees the long service life of the diaphragm.
Pneumatic diaphragm actuators compare the input signal, which affects the diaphragm,with
the compression force from one or several return springs. Through a linear relationship
between actuator travel and trailing force this also results also in a proportionality between
actuator input signal and actuator travel. If one presupposes a linear valve characteristic
and a constant differential pressure a proportionality also exists between the controller
output signal and the process variable, i.e. the flow rate. Because of this feature, the
pneumatic diaphragm actuator soon found wide-spread distribution. Another advantage
of this simple and robust principle is the possibility of avoiding the use of a valve positioner,
if it cannot be justified for economic reasons or in cases of extremely harsh environmental
conditions.
Advantages:
Compact, only few parts required, very reliable.
High actuator thrusts at low air supply pressures (< 6 bar).
Proportional behavior via one or several return springs.
Simple reversal on site possible (direct or reverse).
Automatic failure position in case of auxiliary power loss.
Low hysteresis and excellent sensitivity.
Very broad application range (-35 C to 90 C NBR; -50 C to +120 C EPDM),
lower temperatures with special diaphragm material on request.
Relatively immune to shock and vibrations.
Mounting in any position possible.
High internal tightness allows interlocking for several hours.
Lowest thrust-weight ratio of all actuators.
Best cost/thrust ratio of all actuator types.
Disadvantages:
Limited valve travel (to approx. 1/8 of the diaphragm diameter)
Unsuitable for high supply pressures (> 6 bar).
9.2.2. Lay-out of a suitable valve actuator
The lay-out of a suitable control valve actuator requires that we consider a great number of
parameters. The actuator indeed works only in an optimal manner, if both the process and
environmental conditions as well as the corresponding characteristics and requirement
profiles are exactly known. Based on this information, a calculation of the required actuator
thrust (or torque) can be made and a suitable actuator selected. This depends in the first
place on the main criteria: required actuator thrust, stroking speed and failure position.
In addition to these main parameters, there are a number of further actuating variables,
which have additionally to be considered during the calculation and specification of a
suitable actuator.
The following parameters and conditions are noted without suggesting that the list
is definitive:
Type of movement (linear or rotational).
Transient response (proportional or integral).
Action of movement (direct or reverse).
Failure position in case of auxiliary power loss: (Open, Closed, Hold).
Actuator signal (electrical or pneumatic).
Input signal range (e.g. 4 to 20 mA).
Nominal travel or nominal angle of rotation.
Mounting interface between valve and actuator.
Required actuator thrust with closed valve.
Required actuator thrust with open valve.
Required travel rigidity (stiffness) for a stable control service.
Permissible accuracy deviation from the characteristic curve.
Hysteresis, reversal error and sensitivity.
Regulating time for full stroke travel or angle of rotation.
Switching frequency (on time in percent for of electric actuators).
Actuator volume (in case of pneumatic actuator).
Time constant and corner frequency (with positioner).
Resistance against shock and vibration (fatigue strength of actuator).
Permissible ambient temperatures.
Required protection class (against dust, water, moisture, e.g. IP65).
Requirements with regard to corrosion resistance.
Actuator and all accessories like positioners, boosters, solenoid valves and air supply
pressure reduction device need proper air quality acc. to ISO 8573-1 Class 4 regarding
micro-parts ( 1.0 < d < 5 m; < 1000 parts/m
3
) and Class 3 ( 1 mg/m
3
) regarding oil
contamination otherwise filter systems are needed to protect each device.
Required auxiliary energy for actuator (e.g. min. and max. pressure).
Typical characteristics (e.g. effective diaphragm area).
Actuator connections (e.g. G to G1 or to 1 NPT).
Repeatability of positioning taking into account:
Ambient temperature.
Auxiliary energy.
Process conditions.
Other requirements, e.g. manual operation required for emergency situations?
Therefore the user of valve actuators should prepare a check list, which contains all the
important requirements and limiting conditions before he begins to specify the actuator.
By this method it is ensured that all required functions have been considered, and an
optimal actuator type for the respective task can be selected.
9.2.3. Required actuator thrust for globe valves
The fluid causes static and dynamic reaction forces which act on the plug and which must
be absorbed, to a large extent, by the valve actuator. Static forces occur only with the
valve closed i.e. if the flow is zero. In this case the internal pressure of the fluid attempts
- in the normal flow direction - to open the valve and push the valve stem outwards.
Dynamic forces result from heavy turbulence of the fluid. These forces cause vibrations
and oscillations which often lead to early wear and tear in the valve or even failure of
specific valve and/or actuator parts.
Static forces of a globe valve
A final control element, as represented schematically in Figure 9.2.3.-1, with a flow
direction against the plug from below, tends to open, since the fluid pressure tries to push
the plug upwards against the thrust of the actuator. This flow direction has been proven
to be most effective and is used, in particular, with spring opposed pneumatic diaphragm
actuators which have normally only limited travel rigidity. With a reversed flow, i.e. flow-to-
close, instability might occur as will be demonstrated later. The total static thrust required
in order to close a globe valve against the actual pressure differential, results from the
sum of the individual force components which is briefly explained below. The necessary
equations for a detailed calculation, the symbols and common units are shown.
Flow force F
p
Assuming a normal flow direction from below against the plug (Figure 9.2.3.-1), the flow
force can be computed if inlet pressure and outlet pressure as well as the characteristic
values of the final control element are known. This is firstly the cross-sectional area of
the valve seat and stem. For valves with bellows seal its mean diameter should be used.
Since the cross-section of the seat ring is usually large compared to the stem cross-
section, the flow force increases approx. proportionally with the differential pressure.
Sealing force F
SF
(Closing force)
Today one expects from a final control element not only a good rangeability, but often also
tight shut-off capabilities are required. The permissible leakage is defined in accordance
with IEC-60534-4, where different leakage classes apply (II to VI). A correct lay-out of a
suitable actuator requires not only a compensation of the flow force which results from the
differential pressure in the closed position, but beyond there this a considerable closing
force with which the plug must be pressed into the valve seat required, in order to achieve
the specified leakage rate or tight shut-off. As experience shows, a leakage-dependent
specific seating force is required (per millimeter seat ring circumference) in order to
enable satisfactory tightness. This means that the required closing force is approximately
proportional to the seat ring diameter.
F
a
F
R
F
SF
F
p
S
b
S
d
Figure 9.2.3.-1: Static forces acting on a globe valve (schematic)
Friction force F
R
Most control valves still use a stuffing box which is required for the sealing of the valve
stem (shaft), PTFE and graphite, which are often combined with special filling materials
in order to improve hysteresis and sensitivity, are the most common package materials
used today. Friction in the stuffing box can be roughly computed if the stem diameter
d, the maximum pressure p and the package type are known. Generally, the frictional
force increases proportionally with the stem diameter and the working pressure. A special
packing coefficient is associated with the packing material.
Friction force F
RB
in pressure balanced valves
The principle of pressure balance is often applied on large valve sizes and high differential
pressures. As a result, the actuator thrusts remains small in comparison with a non-
pressure balanced control valve. The causes of friction are dynamic forces, which result
mainly from the gap flow in the guide bushing and which press the plug firmly against
the wall of the guide bushing. It is therefore erroneous to assume that pressure balanced
valves require only very small actuator thrusts. These frictional forces in fact increase
proportionally with the diameter of the guide bushing and with the differential pressure.
Additional piston rings, which are often inserted in the plug to keep the leakage low,
make things worse. Ignoring this frictional force is sometimes the reason why the final
control element is unable to close, since the differential pressure normally increases with
a decreasing flow, so that the friction force becomes highest near the closed position. The
jamming effect is especially troublesome strongly with fluids which have no lubrication
features e.g. like dry overheated steam or other dry gases.
The pressure balance contoured plug seat configuration of SAMSON AG has not been
changed to the non pressure balanced standard trim. The unique balanced design -see
Chapter 6 Fig. 6.2.4.-3 is sealed in the valve bonnet and not in the seat area,
Therefore the risk of jamming is minimized as well as the high dirt sensitiveness known
from other cage retained pressure balanced systems.
Weight force F
M
In a case of a very heavy opturator (plug) with a considerable mass, emphasis must
naturally give also to the weight of the plug (depending on the mounting position of the
control valve), if the actuator has to be able to open or close the final control element
against gravity forces.
9.2.4. Dynamic forces need to be considered in case of flow to close tendencies
When considering static forces, the main factors apply to the valve in the closed position,
i.e. the actuator must be able to close the valve against the highest differential pressure,
On the other hand, an accurate and stable control service should be achieved for pressure
balanced and/or double seated valves, in spite of low actuator forces and a relatively
small travel stiffness when dynamic forces exist. Provided a comprehensive actuator
calculation for a single seated control valve has been carried out, and that it considers
all essential factors, the dynamic forces can usually be ignored because static forces
normally predominate to a great extent.
A different situation exists, however, in the case of a double seated or pressure balanced
control valve. Here the dynamic forces can considerably exceed the static forces. This
means that unstable regulating service and/or inadequate control characteristics might
occur. The regulation service becomes particularly critical if with direct action, the
installed characteristic of the pneumatic diaphragm actuator flattens so far that different
travel positions can be assigned to the same actuator input signal (Figure 9.2.4.-1). This
effect can be observed with control valves with a flow direction to close, i.e. the flow
enters the valve from entry point on top of the plug. This misapplication often results in
an uncertain correlation between the actuator input signal and the corresponding valve
travel and should be avoided under all circumstances. While the signal range of the
actuator becomes greater with the normal flow direction to open (approx. 160 % in
Figure 9.2.4.-1), the signal range decreases in the case of re-verse flow direction (approx.
65 %) and this might cause instability.
Considerable instability is often found near the closed position but rarely also instability
can be found at opening position if here the total signal pressure characteristic SB turns
negative (see Figure 9.2.4.-2 and Figure 9.2.4.-3). The plug usually flutters in this range
and not only prevents a stable regulation, but also tends to self-destruction through
hammer effects. The dynamic forces acting on the internals of the control valve can
be greatly suppressed, if an actuator with sufficient rigidity (travel stiffness) is employed,
Unlike self-locking electro actuators or very inflexible electro hydraulics actuators,
pneumatic diaphragm actuators have only a limited stiffness, which is determined by the
spring rate of the return spring(s). Empirically based findings prove that a satisfactory
regulation can be expected even in the case of limited travel stiffness.
Naturally, the requirements increase with an increasing differential pressure and with
a larger diameter of plug. A re-calculation of the required minimum travel stiffness is
recommended, if (1) high differential pressures occur, (2) the valve is pressure balanced,
(3) the flow direction is reverse (flow-to-open). Since the user very seldom knows the
precise physical dimensions in the case of an installed valve, the actual flow coefficient
(C
v100
value) can also be used in a rough calculation. In addition, a valve specific stability
factor may be utilized in order to observe the dynamic behavior of the valve depending
on the trim. Cage and contoured plug valves, for instance, behave more favorably in this
respect than do valves with parabolic plugs.
% 0 10 20
0.2
30 40
0.4
50 60
0.6
70 80
0.8
90 100
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Signal range (bar)
Valve open Valve closed
F
l
o
w

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

F
T
O
B
e
n
c
h
ra
n
g
e
Flow
direction F
T
C
instable
Resulting force of fluid and spring for ATC
Figure 9.2.4.-1: Characteristics of a pneumatic diaphragm actuator at different flow directions (schematic)
w
FTC + ATO
Y
x
p
1
p
2
SB
S
B
S
z
S
z
Safe control range
p
st
Travel
0.45
p100
f
p0

p100
f
p0

p
st0
p
st100
Dynamic
Joukowsky peak
Water hammer
Spring force
Fluid force
S0
Signal pressure - Travel diagram with non-stable signal pressure characteristic SB if
the slope (gain) turns negative (-) to the positive (+) spring slope.
Risk of hunting (hammering) at small opening < 20 % travel and also possible
oscillation (hunting) at > 35 % travel if p
max
<< p
0
, respectively at 45 % travel if
p
max
= p
0
= constant.
Sz = fluid force characteristic: f(p
100
/p
0
)
In case of high liquid velocities in long larger pipes at valve upstream there could be at
least always a dynamic risk of water hammer (Joukowsky peak).
Figure 9.2.4.-2: Signal pressure - Travel diagram with non-stable signal pressure characteristic
S
B
S
B
S
0
S
z
p
st
Travel
Avoid to control at small
opening (10 to 20 %)
ATO
S
z
Signal pressure - Travel diagram with
stable signal pressure characteristic SB
characteristic from a static point of view.
Higher actuator stiffness keeps the signal
pressure characteristic slope positive (+)
like the slope of the spring characteristic.
See equation (9-10) to optimize actuator
stiffness.
To avoid any risk of unpredictable
hammering near the seating area
avoid any control function below 20 % or
alternatively use a pressure balance valve
or an electrical actuator.
Figure 9.2.4.-3: Signal pressure - Travel diagram with stable signal pressure characteristic
Typical trim confgurations with fow to close tendencies:
Without going to details some graphics of the total force characteristic, which may turn
from flow to open (stable) to flow to close (non stable tendencies) are sometimes causing
trouble in liquid applications, if actuator sizing with know how not taken account stability
in all travel positions.
Angle type valves:
(FTC in case of safety reasons; abrasive fluids; severe service)
Perforated plugs need for liquids FTC for effective sound reduction
Double seated valves:
If flow goes from outside (above the plugs) to inside
Three way valves:
For dividing service with compact plug design or mixing service with two plugs above the
seats.
This trim selection must be avoided in case of after sale trim replacements. SAMSON AG
avoid FTC tendencies with a compact trim for mixed service and a splitted two plug trim
for dividing service.
Rotary control valves:
For butterfly and most of other rotary control valves the actuator sizing should take
care of all static- and dynamic forces for all travel positions and need a special look to
the actuator stiffness, if the dynamic force, which general has a FTC tendency is not
negligible.
Only a larger stiffness - which is (p
st100
- p
st0
) A - can minimize the break off torque
and carefully looking to travel start and travel end and the necessarily spring force or air
supply can avoid bad surprises.
Figure 9.2.4.-4: Leusch Butterfly Type LTR 43
S
B

1
S
0

l
i
n
e
a
r
S
B

2
(
-
)

S

d
y
n
.

S

s
t
a
t
.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Opening angle
Break off
Fail safe: ATO (closed by spring force)
Min. air supply p
su
p
st
open

p
st
close
Instable opening
for control > 70
p
su
2p
st0
p
st
(p
su
- p
st100
)M
A
S dyn
p
st0
M
A
p
su
M
A
S stat.
M
A
Torque
Signal pressure - opening diagram ATO (Closed with spring force)
S
0
Spring characteristic
() M
L
= friction (break off) torque (against direction of travel)
() M
St
= Shaft sealing torque (against direction of travel)
(-) M
dyn
= dynamic torque f(size, p) (closing direction)
SB1, SB2 Signal pressure characteristic to open and to close the rotary valve.
Take care of the necessarily min. air supply and min. pre-load of the spring
To check: p
st0
M
A
> M
L
+M
St

(p
su
p
st100
) M
A
> M
dyn.
+ M
St
Figure 9.2.4.-5: Signal pressureopening diagram ATO
S
0

l
i
n
e
a
r
(
-
)

S

d
y
n
.

S

s
t
a
t
.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Opening angle
Break off torque
Fail safe: ATC (open by spring force)
p
st
open
p
st100

p
st0
p
su
- p
st100
p
su
= 2p
st100
p
st
close
Instable opening
for control > 70
S
B

2
S
B

1
Min. spring pre-load torque
Min. air supply
p
su
p
st
M
A
Torque
Signal pressure - opening diagram ATC (Closed with air pressure).

The dynamic torque (-) M
dyn.
in some applications like flow machines anti-surge
control with high performance low noise butterfly valves can get much higher values
than shown here in case of high p at max. load.
This closing torque need to be balanced safety with a necessarily spring pre-load
torque.
See sizing example
To check: (p
su
p
st100
) M
A
> M
L
+ M
St
p
st00
M
A
> M
L
+ M
St
p
st0
M
A
> M
dyn.
+ M
St
Figure 9.2.4.-6: Signal pressureopening diagram ATC
9.2.5. Calculation and selection of an actuator
For the selection of a suitable pneumatic diaphragm actuator, it is vital to work through
the previously mentioned check list. The following questions, which have a decisive
influence on the actuator selection procedure, are to be answered without fail in this
respect:
Failure position: valve either closed or open?
Nominal valve travel: actuator travel must be valve travel.
Prescribed flow direction: flow to open or flow to close?
Important physical dimensions: seat and stem diameter?
Packing type: PTFE or graphite?
Flow coefficient (C
v100
value)?
Required actuator thrust in closed valve position?
Required minimum full stroke regulating time for nominal valve travel?
Is a positioner required? If not: required signal range?
Does the interface match the actuator and the control valve?
Minimum air supply pressure of the plant?
Supply air quality can have a major impact to safety functions. Filter systems are
recommended for each devise to keep air quality acc. to ISO 8573-1 in locations with
lower standards.
Minimum and maximum ambient temperatures?
Required shock and/or vibration resistance?
Special requirements with respect to corrosion resistance?
Other demands of the customer?
When all these items have been considered, a corresponding calculation and selection of
a suitable valve actuator can be made.
9.2.5.1 General notes for the calculation and selection of actuators
A sufficient additional safety factor should always be planned, since an exact
calculation of the required actuator thrust is quite complex and there could be a
difference in the force balance from final inspection to after commissioning under
process conditions as well as after long term operations.
For DIN/DVGW valves and other quick closing and safety control valves (TV
certificated) the actuator safety factor must be about 2.
SAMSON Valve Sizing (SVS and SVSS) creates a general warning, if the safety
factor become < 1.1. This min. safety factor expects ideal environmental condition
like an in-house installation- and equates to the competitive conduct.
Environmental conditions at delivery and plant location are often unknown as well
how long valves are stored before commissioning. Valves may be delivered in
hazardous areas and stored less protected. Then sealing material will be attacked
from rain, sand and petrochemical dust and sometimes it can take month before the
plant is ready for start up. Any packing-stem system will suffering more under static
not pressurized conditions.
The valve system friction may increase also from lack in commissioning (pipe
installation without force compensation due to temperature elongation). Long term
age-hardening of packing and sealing material occurs in case of no proper frequently
maintenance.
It is recommended to use a higher than 1.1 safety factor in case of those unknown
(not ideal) random conditions.
Therefore the required actuator force (trust): F
o
= 1.25 F
a
Large effective areas reduce the negative influence of friction forces on control valve
performance by minimizing hysteresis and dead band.
At request of the highest control controllability for expensive products like insulin also
a low price actuator of smallest size may close against a moderate low shut down
pressure. The valve performance and controllability interacting to the production
quality and quantity, which significantly can improved with a larger actuator size
selected in the first priority for lowest hysteresis and not for the shut down pressure.
Diaphragm actuators have a considerably smaller hysteresis than piston actuators (up
to 40 % hysteresis due to piston seals), which the positioned is likely to be unable to
compensate on long term.
Several spring assemblies with smaller springs distributed over the circumference offer
a greater accuracy and mechanical stability than fewer large springs arranged in the
center. In addition, the variability of the spring range and the stiffness of the actuator
are increased
The actuator characteristic should, ideally, be linear and the hysteresis small. Linearity
errors stem mostly from a changing diaphragm area which might possibly result in an
inadequate actuator thrust in the closed position.
The actuator selection should also consider durability and maintenance.
An application in the following climatic conditions should be guaranteed:
Moderate
Cold
Dry warm
Humid and warm
Constructional arrangement of the valve interface and general firmness of the actuator
should meet all requirements considering at the same time ambient influences.
Demands regarding earthquake safety and/or radiation resistance in nuclear power
plants are examples of this point.
The selection of a suitable actuator should always consider possible future
enhancements. Subsequent mounting of a hand wheel or positioner might be taken
as examples. Mounting possibilities of further accessories should also be considered.
Fatigue strength and impact resistance ought to be considered e.g. as they occur on
ships.
Corrosion-resistant paint coatings should be applied, in order to protect the actuator
and guarantee the specified service life.
All aspects of accident safety must be considered, in order to protect users against
injuries.
An adequate quality assurance system (ISO 9001) and attention paid to valid standards
and regulations is necessary, to guarantee correct state of the art products.
9.2.6. Fail-safe action
When the signal pressure fails, the fail-safe action of the actuator depends on whether the
springs are installed in the top or bottom diaphragm chamber.
Actuator stem extends (ATO)
When the signal pressure is reduced or the air supply fails, the springs move the actuator
stem downwards and close the valve.
The valve opens when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force
exerted by the springs.
Actuator stem retracts (ATC)
stem upwards and open the valve.
The valve closes when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force
ATC
p
st
p
st
ATO
p
st
= Signalpressure
Black arrow = Spring force
Blue arrow = Air pressure
p
st
FTC + ATC
p
st
FTC + ATO
p
st
FTO + ATC
p
st
FTO + ATO
Figure 9.2.6.-1: Fail-safe action
9.2.6.1 Major application cases
One must distinguish between the following application cases before beginning the
relevant calculation procedure:
(a) Valve without pressure balance,
FTO flow direction to open, ATO (air failurespring CLOSED).
(b) Valve without pressure balance,
FTO flow direction to open, ATC (air failurespring OPEN).
(c) Valve with pressure balance,
FTO flow direction to open, ATO (air failurespring CLOSED).
(d) Valve with pressure balance,
FTO flow direction to open, ATC (air failure spring OPEN).
(e) Valve without pressure balance,
FTC flow direction to close, ATO (air failurespring CLOSED.
(f) Valve with pressure balance,
FTC flow direction to close, ATO (air failurespring CLOSED.
(g) Valve with - or without pressure balance,
FTC flow direction to close, ATC (air failurespring OPEN.
The application mentioned under (g), i.e. valve with - or without pressure balance, flow
direction to close and valve on air failure OPEN, must be avoided, because full stability
can hardly be expected under these conditions (see Figure 9.2.4.-1).
The required effective area of the actuator diaphragm and therefore the required actuator
size is derived from the previously calculated actuator thrust. It is always recommended to
add an additional safety factor of approx. 1.25 in order to ensure that the actuator is able to
close the final control element, under all conditions, against the max. upstream pressure p
1

or against the specified max. differential pressure p
A
. The following equations consider
the relationships between actuator and valve in the different application examples.
9.2.6.2 Flow force
Depending to the customer specification p is declared as p
A
; p
0
or p
1
max.
For actuator sizing this value has the highest cost influence and must be clarified before
starting the offer.
Without pressure balance trim:
FTO fow to open
Flow force F
p
= trust is opening (+) and need F
a
trust to close (-)
( ) ( )
2 2
b d 2
F S p S p
p
4 10

= +

(9-1)
If in the majority of trim variations the seat diameter S
b
is essential larger than the stem
or bellows seal diameter S
d
the influence of S
d
is negligible.
( )
2
b
F S p
p
4 10

(9-1.2.1)
FTC flow to close
F
p
trust is closing (-) and need F
a
trust to open (+)
( ) ( )
2 2 2
b d d 2
F S S p S p
p
4 10

(9-1.2.2)
The term for the closing force F
p
= (S
b
2
S
d
2
) p /(4 10) need to have a force
correction for the open position with factor f:
f = 0 if p
100
/p
0
tends to zero; f = 0.4 if p
100
/p
0
tends to 1
f = 0.4 based on measurements with parabolic plugs (mentioned in VDI/VDE 3844)
Remark: F
p
at open position = F
p
f
With Pressure balance trim:
FTO flow to open: (Standard flow direction)
F
p
and F
p1
trust result to open (+) and need F
a
trust to close (-)
In case of D
a
> S
b

( ) ( )
2 2 2
a b d 1
F D S p S p
p
4 10

= +

(9-1.3.1)
In case of D
a
= S
b
(Standard for SAMSON pressure balance)
2
p1 d 1
F S p
4 10
(9-1.3.2)
FTC flow to close (on request for an angle type valve)
F
p
and F
p1
trust result to close (-) and need F
a
trust to open (+)
In case of D
a
> S
b
( ) ( )
2 2 2
a b d 1
F D S p S p
p
4 10

(9-1.4.1)
In case of D
a
= S
b
(Standard for SAMSON pressure balance)
2
p1 d 1
F S p
4 10
(9-1.4.2)
b d
S S >>
9.2.6.3 Sealing, friction and other forces
Sealing force F
SF
if valve closed H = 0
(9-2)
=
SF 2 b
F f S
f
2
= for required leakage class N/mm
Metallic 2 Class IV
Lapped in 20 Class V
Soft sealing 0.3 Class VI
Packing/Sealing friction F
R
without pressure balance
R 1 d
F f S = (9-3)
Stem seal Friction coefficient f
1
N/mm
Series
3240 3250
DN up to 150 DN > 150
Packing number 1 2 2
PTFE- packing 1.6 3.2 3.2
Graphite-packing 5 10 10
Bellows 1.6 1.6
Insulated section 1.6 1.6
Univerdit Alchem 3.2 3.2
Figure 9.2.6.3.-1: Stem seal Friction coefficient f1
Friction in pressure balanced valves
RB 3 a
F f D =
(9-4)
Stem seal Friction coefficient f3 N/mm
With PTFE seal 3.0
With Graphite seal 10
Weight force of plug and actuator stem system
M
F M g =
(9-5)
Remark: - M normal installation; + M reverse hanging installation
M = Mass of plug and actuator stem system
g = Gravity acceleration g = 9.81 m/s
2
Of interest only at larger sizes: DN 200 approximately 200 N
DN 300 approximately 450 N
Weight forces (F
M
) for small sizes are negligible.
In this way, the following basic equations will apply for the calculation of the required
actuator thrust considering the valve type, the flow direction and the respective failure
position of the final control element:
9.2.6.4 Actuator force F
a
in all cases of (a) to (f) Chapter 9.2.6.1
Actuator force F
a
Case (a) and case (b):
No pressure balance, flow to open,
failure position: ATC - OPEN or ATO - CLOSED,
( )
a p SF R
F F F F FM
= + + +
(9-6)
From the variables of equation (9-1) equation (9-2) equation (9-3) we get:
( ) ( )
2 2
a b d 2 2 B 1 d
F S p S p f S f S M g
4 10

= + + + +

(9-6.1)
Case (c) and case (d):
With pressure balance, flow to open, failure position OPEN or CLOSED
(9-7)
a p1 SF R RB
F F F F F (FM) = + + + +
(9-7.1)
( )
2
a d 1 2 B 1 d 3 a
F S p (f S f S f D ) M g
4 10
= + + + +
Case (e):
No pressure balance, flow to close, failure position CLOSED
( )
= + +
a p R M
F F F F
(9-8)
( ) ( )
2 2 2
a b d d 2 1 d
F S S p S p f S M g
4 10

= + +

(9-8.1)
If S
b
>> S
d
equation (9-8.1) could be simplified:
( )
2 2
a b d
F S S p M g
4 10
= +
(9-8.2)
F
a
trust here is needed to open the valve from 0 to 100 % travel.
Important to check the actuator stiffness for control stability with equation (9-10) and
check the closing position if the closing pressure differential is too small.
st0 SF R 2 b 1 d
10 p A F F f S f S > + = +
Case (f):
With pressure balance, flow to close, failure position CLOSED
( )
a p1 R RB
F F F F FM = + + +
(9-9)
in case of S
b
= D
a
( )
2
a d 1 1 d 3 a
F S p f S f D M g
4 10
= + + +
(9-9.1)
F
a
trust here is needed to open the valve from 0 to 100% travel.
Important to check the actuator stiffness for control stability with equation (9-10) and
check the closing position if the closing pressure differential is too small.
( )
st0 SF RB 2 b 1 d 3 a
10 p A F F f S f S f D > + = + +
With a reverse flow direction (fluid tends to close the valve), the plug is pressed into
the seat by the differential pressure. This application should be limited to special cases
only, in order to avoid instability with fine control requirements. A few exceptions are
applications where it is either favorable
To exploit the reaction force of the differential pressure for secure closing of the valve
and/or to achieve tight shut-off, or
To limit wear and tear inside the valve body caused - in the case of angle type valves
- by erosion or/and abrasion.
One main criterion for achieving adequate actuator stability is the difference of force
gradients, when a reverse flow direction is chosen. Generally there exists in every travel
position of the actuator, a balance between the actuator thrust which is determined by the
effective diaphragm area multiplied by the actuator input signal and the trailing force of
the return spring(s).
Under dynamic conditions high fluid forces can occur, which act on the plug and
considerably disturb this balance. From Figure 9.2.4.-1 it becomes clear, that the effective
signal range in the case of direct action and a flow direction to close is considerably
decreased which leads, unavoidably, to instability, since the force gradient resulting from
fluid forces is higher that of the return spring(s). This makes, in such a case, a satisfactory
regulation impossible. For this reason, the combination (direct action and flow to close
service) should be excluded under all circumstances.
However, the flow direction to close is even with reverse action (valve closed in case
of air failure) not without problems. Near the closed position the reaction forces of the
control valve normally increase greatly and may be superposed by a so called Joukowsky
peak at larger sizes, long upstream pipe and high pipe velocity, so that the force balance
is suddenly disturbed considerably. This imbalance can be slightly improved by the
application of a positioner. The response time is, however, not fast enough by far, so that
a continuous hammering of the plug might occur near the closed position.
This must be in all circumstances avoided for wear and tear reasons. Essential for stable
actuator operation is a sufficiently high spring rate whose force gradient must be higher
at any travel position than the force gradient resulting from dynamic valve reaction
forces. Furthermore, it should be noted that the actuator force direction of flow to close
applications is reverse, i.e. the actuator force hat to pull the plug out of the seat. One
should further differentiate between control service and ON-OFF service. In the latter
case, a continuous hammering effect cannot occur, since the critical range is usually
passed through very quickly. Important with reverse flow conditions is an examination of
the required actuator rigidity or travel stiffness, in order to assure a stable control service.
This stiffness depends on the spring rate and the diaphragm area of the pneumatic
actuator: A (p
st100
- p
st0
).
Adequate control stability can be expected if the required maximum actuator thrust is in a
certain relationship to the signal range of the actuator. The required signal range which,
in turn, determines the travel stiffness can be roughly checked by means of the following
equations. The disadvantageous case that the valve authority p
100
/p
0
tends to zero,
(means p
qmax
<< p
0
) need the highest actuator stiffness and from safety point of view
expressed with a factor 2 in equation 9-10.
For a continuous stable control service the following rule applies for FTC:
Without pressure balance:
1
( )
st100 st0 p
A p p 10 2 F
>
(9-10)
( )
2 2
b d 0
F S S p
p
4 10

(9-10.1)
for cases S
d
<< S
b
and p
0
/ p
100
< 0.2
( )
2
st100 st0 b 0
A p p 0.016 S p >
(9-10.2)
With pressure balance:
( )
st100 st0 p1
A p p 10 2 F >
(9-10.3)
2
p1 d 1
F S p
4 10
(9-10.4)
In case of D
a
= S
b
(Standard for SAMSON pressure balance.
The factor 2 in equation (9-10) tends to factor 1 if the valve authority p
100
/p
0
also
tends from 0 to 1.
p
0
roughly can be substitute with the max. p at q
min.
but not with the specified p
A

for actuator closing, which could be much higher than p
0
. Control actions are not
recommended below 20 % travel.
1 Lean on VDI 3844 draft 2010-05
For ON-OFF service the following rule applies for FTC
( )
st100 st0 p
A p p 10 1.33 F
>
(9-11)
Based on long term experience with perforated plugs (FTC) a proven rule-of-thumb for
the maximum permissible differential pressure p
0
has been derived from equation 9-10
and 9-11 for applications with a flow direction to close.
p
0
roughly can be substitute with the max. p at q
min.
but not with the specified p
A
for
actuator closing, which could be much higher than p
0
.
For control service:
( )
( )
0 st100 st0
2 2
b d
100
p 0.5 A p p 4
S S
=

(9-12)
The factor 0.5 tends to factor 1 if the valve authority p
100
/p
0
also tends from 0 to 1.
For ON-OFF service:
( )
( )
0 st100 st0
2 2
b d
100
p 0.75 A p p 4
S S
=

(9-13)
9.2.6.5 Safety factors to actuator sizing
Important requirements and safety factors to actuator sizing published in SAMSON
VALVE SIZING SVS and SVSS.
Figure 9.2.6.5.-1: SAMSON Actuator sizing
F
a
: delivered actuator trust kN
F
oreq.
: Required actuator trust kN
F
mreq.
: Required actuator trust (Pressure balanced) kN
F
max.
: Actuator trust: Max. allowed trust depends to max. temperature kN
p
max.
: Allowed p depends to the chosen actuator and strength of the stem bar
p
s0req.
: Min. required pre-load spring force p
st0
for fail safe ATO bar
p
S
: min. required air supply p
st100
for fail safe ATC bar
To check in case of pressure balance trim:
p
S
: min. req. Air supply p
st100
for full opening ATO bar
Handling safety factors SF:
Safety factor SF delivered actuator trust / required actuator trust.
The factor SF is the result of selecting the actuator type (e.g. actuator data sheet
information from Chapter 9.2.22 to Chapter 9.2.22.2 with higher trust than calculated.
The responsible engineer should have information about environment, installation,
local maintenance and warrantee conditions as well as special customer requirements.
See also Chapter 9.2.5.1. If this random conditions are critical it is recommended to size
SF higher than 1.1 (SVSS software warning value).
If 1.1 < SF < 1.25 select an actuator type with SF equal or near to 1.25.
(Is the SVSS software warning 2.0 than select near to 2.0)
F
a
/F
o
or F
a
/F
m
without or with pressure balance warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing
Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 1.1 recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25
Open safety factor: only for fail safe ATC
F
f
/F
w
warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 2.0
F
f
= p
st0
= pre-load spring trust, F
w
= system friction
9.2.6.6 Calculation examples (pressure balance):
F
p1
forces can support to open (FTO) or to close (FTC) the valve. In case of pressure
balance this forces are small in comparison to the total system friction forces
w R RB
F F F c = + +
Flow to open FTO
Fail safe ATO
Closing safety factor:
( )
a st0
2
m
d 1 2 b 1 d 3 a
F A p 10
F
S p f S f S f D
4 10

=
+ + +
Opening safety factor:

( )
( )
su st100
a
m 1 d 3 a
A p p 10
F
F f S f D

=
+
Warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 1.1
recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25
Flow to open FTO
Fail safe ATC
( )
( )
su st100
a
2
m
d 1 2 b 1 d 3 a
A p p 10
F
F
S p f S f S f D
4 10

=
+ + +
Open safety factor:

( )
a st0
m 1 d 3 a
F A p 10
F f S f D

=
+
Flow to close FTC:
From safety point of view a specifed high shut down pressure p
A
should only be used
to check the valve and trim-stem system material strength values. In many applications
p
A
could decrease to smaller values at least to atmosphere after the valve is closed.
The required seat tightness quality (e.g. Class V) should stay under all p conditions.
Flow to close FTC
Fail safe ATO
( )
a st0
m 2 b 1 d 3 a
F A p 10
F f S f S f D

=
+ +
( )
( )
su st100
a
m p1 1 d 3 a
A p p 10
F
F F f S f D

=
+ +
The term
2
p1 d 1
F S p f
4 10
in case of pressure balance is nearly negligible

f = 0 if p
100
/p
0
100
/p
0
tends to 1
Flow to close FTC
Fail safe ATC
( )
( )
su st100
a
m 2 b 1 d 3 a
A p p 10
F
F f S f S f D

=
+ +
Open safety factor:
( )
a st0
m p1 1 d 3 a
F A p 10
F F f S f D

=
+ +
The term
2
p1 d 1
F S p f
4 10
in case of pressure balance is nearly negligible

f = 0 if p
100
/p
0
100
/p
0
tends to 1.
Calculation example without pressure balance:
Same method than above but delete f
3
D
a
and replace F
p1
trust with F
p
trust
equations without pressure balance.
Flow direction FTC
Fail safe ATO
a st0
m 2 b 1 d
F A p 10
F f S f S

=
+
( )
su st100
a
m p 1 d
A p p 10
F
F F f f S

=
+
Warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVSS if SF < 1.1
The term for the closing force
( )
2 2
b d
F S S p
p
4 10

Need to have a force correction for the open position with factor f:
f = 0 if p
100
/p
0
100
/p
0
tends to 1
f = 0.4 based on measurements with parabolic plugs (mentioned in VDI/VDE 3844)
9.2.6.7 Calculation of the Hysteresis:
SAMSON VALVE SIZING SVSS specialist can check the hysteresis of the valve actuator
system. A value which plays an important role for the total controllability.
As a rule of thumb the hysteresis of a valve system without positioned should be < 5 %
and with a positioner type of medium quality < 15%.
For modern high quality positioners in the process industry SVSS the software generates
a warning if the value is > 30%.

( )
w
st100 st0
2 F
Hysteresis % 100 30%
10 A p p
= <

(9-14)
If Hysteresis > 30% increase actuator stiffness: A (p
st100
- p
st0
)
More calculation examples are shown in Chapter 20 page 10 and page 26.
9.2.6.8 Required actuator torque for rotary valves
The calculation procedure of the required actuator torque for control valves with rotary
motion of 60 to 90 degree is less clear than that for globe valves. One reason is that the
torque of rotary actuators does not always increase proportionally with the supply air
pressure and/or the start point of the signal range in the case of reverse action. On the
other hand, further factors must be included in calculations which do not occur in the
calculations for globe valves. This means that the calculation procedure - compared to
globe valves - is more complex. The differences become evident when considering ball
valves. The governing variables for the required torque are the following:
Maximum differential pressure.
Mean diameter of sealing elements.
Friction coefficient between ball and sealing element.
External ball diameter.
Required contact pressure of the sealing rings.
Diameter of the thrust bearings.
Outer diameter of the trunnions.
Friction coefficient between bearings and trunnion.
Fluid factor (which influences friction).
Packing friction (dependent on packing material).
Break-off torque after long down-time.
For other rotary type valves plays the bearing friction also a critical role in the determination
of the required actuator thrust or torque. In the case of eccentric rotary valves additional
factors have to be considered. The required torque e.g. depends besides friction and
breakaway forces on the inherent eccentricity. For these reasons it is not very practical
to develop special equations with which the required torque can be exactly computed.
Especially complicated relationships apply in the case of so-called rotary actuators, which
often utilize an electric or pneumatic linear actuator and, in addition, a special gear or
linkage to convert the linear motion into a rotation angle between 60 and 90. For these
designs not only the efficiency of the gear or linkage has to be taken into account, but also
the required angle of rotation. In the case of the common double piston type, which uses
a linear actuator and a special internal linkage, which is in turn firmly connected to the
shaft of the rotary valve, the required torque is calculated taking into account the effective
lever length and rotation angle.
As experience has shown however, not only the minimum required torque, but also the
maximum permissible torque must be computed in the case of rotary actuators in order
to avoid deformation or damage of the valve shaft, which sustains the most frequent
damages in chemical industry. The calculation of these actuator torques is solved
most reliably by making use of corresponding computer programs which are based on
manufacturer independent data bases. These consider all variables as listed by the
respective manufacturer. If shaft diameters and materials are known, such a program can
easily determine the maximum permissible actuator torque in order to avoid damage.
9.2.6.9 Actuator torque for standard butterfly valves
For standard butterfly valves, the calculation of the required actuator torque is to some
extent more clear so that as in practice proven calculation equations can be applies here.
Bearing friction torque
Friction torque in the stuffing box
Dynamic torque (see also Figure 9.2.4.-5 and Figure 9.2.4.-6)
An additional safety factor is not needed for common fluids since the maximum occurring
torque is already considered in the equation. The maximum friction torque of the bearing
occurs naturally at the highest differential pressure in the closed-position, while the
maximum dynamic torque occurs at an angle of approx. 70, i.e. when the OPEN-position
is achieved. This means that the two important main variables never do reach their peak
values simultaneously.
Nevertheless, this torque has been reasonably proven in practice for an actuator calculation
and selection. In the case of very high temperatures or high viscous and sticky fluids an
additional safety factor may be applied. Butterfly valves for control services need naturally
more attention than those for ON-OFF services only.
Simplified empirically equations for actuators which applies for standard butterfly
valves are listed below.
(It`s recommended to use this simplified method as a rule of thumb, if no product specific
sizing method is available.)
Bearing friction torque of CLOSED-position ()
( )

2 5
L sd 1 2
M 0.7 d DN p p 10 (9-15)
The torque direction () changes in case of the signal opens or closes the valve, which is
known as break off torque.
Stuffing box friction torque

3 5
st 1 sd
M 10 p d 10
(9-16)
This torque direction () also change against the moving direction and is responsible for
the hysteresis.
Max. dynamic torque at operating point q
max
(-) 50 to 80 degree opening angle
( )
3 5
dyn 1 2
M DN p p 10
(9-17)
This torque always has the tendency to close the valve (-) and get it`s max. value between
50 and 80 degree opening. Depending to the p versus flow characteristic M
L
or M
dyn
or
both torque need special care for actuator sizing.
Total torque (required max. torque for actuator selection)
total_close L St total_open dyn. St
M M M M M M + +
(9-18)
It makes only sense to sum up M
L
+ M
St
torques at closing position (break off torque) and
M
dyn.
+ M
St
torques at opening position where the max. dynamic torque is expected.
Figure 9.2.4.-5 and Figure 9.2.4.-6 explain, that a proper actuator sizing need to look
to all control actions like to open from the seat and to close to the specified leak rate
requirements as well as to open to max load against the dynamic torque. In case of higher
shut down pressure differentials the break off torque should be minimized with the help of
enough actuator stiffness to ensure a large stable control range.
Example:
Severe service butterfly valve: DN 500; Shaft diameter 56 mm
C
v100
= 6600, Fluid crude oil 20 C
q
vmax
operation condition: q
v
=5000 m
3
/h, p
1
= 15 bara, p
2
= 13 bara
q
vmin
operation condition: q
v
=1000 m
3
/h, p
1
= 15.5 bara, p
2
= 11 bara
Shut down condition at p
A
= 16 bar
M
L
0.7 d
Sd
DN
2
(p
1
- p
2
) 10
-5
= 0.7 56 500
2
16 10
-5
= 1568 Nm
M
St
10 p
1

d
Sd
3
10
-5
= 10 15.5 56
3
10
-5
= 272 Nm
M
dyn

DN
3
(p
1
- p
2
) 10
-5
= 500
3
2 10
-5
= 2500 Nm
To check: (See Figure 9.2.4.-6 with position , and for actuator sizing)
(p
su
p
st100
) M
A
> M
L
+ M
St
= 1890 Nm
p
st00
M
A
> M
L
+ M
St
= 1890 Nm
p
st0
M
A
> M
dyn.
+ M
St
= 2772 Nm
The challenge is to select a rotary actuator with about 2772 Nm torque from
p
st0
M
A
, and (p
su
p
st100
) M
A
> 1890 Nm
and high stiffness spring bench rate to minimize the break off.
It is recommended to use this simplified method as a rule of thumb, if no manufacturer
specific sizing method is available.
Butterfly valves and actuators today from concentric to triple-eccentric butterfly valves
with different actuator types may deviate to this rule of thumb sizing and should be sized
more precise from the responsible manufacturer.
Such severe crude oil butterfly valves may operate in oil fields production and separation
plants (upstream) with control actions at small pressure differential.
Sometimes much higher shut down pressure differentials p
A
are specified for start up or
shut down or at least for an unexpected worse case condition. Take special care for the
butterfly mechanical strength limits in case of very high static and/or dynamic torques.
This type specific value (limit of seat and/or shaft load) may be published but must known
in the R&D department of the manufacturer.
Do not leave questions open, if this butterfly valve needs to do a start up or shut down to
high p
A
. Is the start up and shut down supported parallel connected with a bypass valve
under split range control?
Will the valve see the high p
A
only under static closed condition or under dynamic flow
condition?
More about severe applications and split range control see chapter 11.7.
9.2.7. The main group of the pneumatic diaphragm linear actuators
Type 3271
Single-acting linear actuator
Diaphragm areas
80, 240, 350, 700, 1000, 1400, 2800
and 2 x 2800 cm
2
Rated travel
7.5, 15, 30, 60, 120 and 160 mm
Advantages:
Inexpensive to manufacture
Reliable
Power and speed to fit most
applications
Easy to maintain
Relatively light
Fail-safe action easy to obtain
Power source easy to generate
Safe in explosion-hazardous areas
Type 3277
Single-acting linear actuator for integral
positioner attachment
Diaphragm areas
120, 240, 355 and 700 cm
2
Nominal travel
7.5, 15 and 30 mm
Advantages of direct attachment:
Exact and firm mechanical connection
with positioner
Shielded positioner feedback lever
Single pneumatic connection between
positioner and actuator
Additional features like Type 3271
Type 3271-52
Single-acting linear actuator
Diaphragm area 60 cm
2

Rated travel 7.5 mm
Advantages:
Inexpensive to manufacture
Reliable
Power and speed to fit most
applications
Easy to maintain
Relatively light
Fail-safe action easy to obtain
Power source easy to generate
Safe in explosion-hazardous areas
Type 3277-5
Single-acting linear actuator for integral
positioner attachment
Diaphragm area
120 cm
2
Nominal travel
7.5/15 mm
Advantages of direct attachment:
Exact and firm mechanical connection
with positioner
Shielded positioner feedback lever
Single pneumatic connection between
positioner and actuator.
Table 9.2.7.-1: The main groups of the pneumatic diaphragm actuators
Actuator Type 3271 and Type 3277 made of Stainless Steel
Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 and 3277 made of stainless steel (240, 350, and 700
cm
2
) for special applications are in the SAMSON product range.
These actuators are manufactured from the material WN 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9 ).
9.2.8. Technical data for Packing and Plug stem diameter
Packing and Plug stem diameter
Packing
Up to 220C
Up to 428F
Type 3241 / 3251 PTFE-stuffng box without IT
220 to 350C
428 to 662F
3241 ( DN 200 (8")) / 3251 Graphite (H)-stuffng box without IT
350 to 500C
662 to 932F
Type 3241 / 3251 PTFE-stuffng box with IT
> 500C
> 932F
Type 3251 Graphite (H)-stuffng box with IT
Plug stem diameter at Type 3241
DN 15 to 80 " to 3" 10 mm
DN 100 to 150 4" to 6" 16 mm
> DN 150 > 8" 40 mm
Plug stem diameter at Type 3251
DN 15 to 40 " to 1" 12 mm
DN 50 to 100 2" to 4" 16 mm
DN 125 to 150 5" to 6" 25 mm
> DN 200 > 8" 40 mm
Table 9.2.8.1.-1: Packing and Plug stem diameter
9.2.9. Technical data for additional handwheel
Version for actuator
Type 3271-5
Type 3277-5
Type 3271
Type 3277
2
240 cm
2
, 350 cm
2
, 700 cm
2

(only for initial spring
value 2.1 bar)
Materials
Housing
Die-cast aluminum,
powder-coated
St 37-2,
powder-coated
Stem WN 1.4305 Stainless steel WN1.4104
Handwheel Aluminum, powder-coated Cast iron, powder-coated
Table 9.2.9.1.-1: Technical data for additional handwheel
9.2.10. Mechanically adjustable bidirectional travel stop
(With Type 3277 in special version only)
The travel stop can be adjusted upwards or downwards to 50% of the travel.
1 Cap (Cap position determines top travel
limit)
2 Lock nut (determines bottom travel limit)
3 Nut
4 Lock nut
5 Top diaphragm case
6 Diaphragm plate
7 Actuator stem
Actuator stem
retracts
Actuator stem
extends
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Downward travel stop
(Actuator stem extends)
Undo the lock nut (4) and unscrew the
cap (1).
Undo the lock nut (2) and adjust the nut
(3) to set required travel stop.
Tighten the lock nut (2) again.
Upward travel stop
(Actuator stem retracts)
Undo the lock nut (4) and adjust the cap
(1) to set the required travel stop.
Tighten the lock nut (4) again.
Figure 9.2.10.-1: The mechanical travel stop
Figure 9.2.10.-2: Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 with mechanical travel stop
Actuator with travel stop
Mechanically adjustable bidirectional travel stop
For actuator sizes 240, 350, 355, 700, 1000, 1400
and 2800 cm
2
Travel limitation up to 50 % in each direction
Additional features same as standard Type 3271
9.2.11. Manual operation
Figure 9.2.11.-1: Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 with
handwheel
Manual operation of the actuator is
often required by the user in order to
drive the valve into a desired
position, either in the installation
phase, or in case of auxiliary power
loss. The particular demands of the
purchaser have to be precisely
considered.
Clutches or blocking devices of
a manually operated valve via a
hand wheel are usually not wanted
because they require, in the event of
an emergency, additional effort and
action from the user. This means that
in the first instance a coupling or link
with the actuator stem is necessary
and then the blocking device has to
be disconnected again.
This additional operation increases
the risk of a malfunction of the hand
wheel and valuable time, in the event
of an emergency, might be lost. Ideal
hand wheels have to be set only in a
neutral position which will not hinder
the movement of the actuator stem
during automatic operation.
In cases however where a manual
operation is required, a positioning
of the actuator and the connected
valve stem is easily possible for both directions (valve OPEN or CLOSED), without the
need for additional steps or actions.
The philosophy of manual operation equipment distinguishes between top-mounted
Figure 9.2.11.-1 and side-mounted hand wheels. This should be clearly stated in the case
of any order.
Top-mounted hand wheels are normally simpler and cheaper than hand wheels mounted
on the side. Disadvantageous of this design are mostly a higher operation thrust and less
convenient accessibility to the hand wheel.
Sometimes the user refuses pneumatic or electrical actuators completely, if only rare
changes of the valve position are necessary but, nevertheless, a high rangeability and a
clean characteristic curve is required.
In such cases, precision manual operation should be selected. Since the operating thrusts
to change the travel position of the actuator can be quite large with bigger valve sizes
and with high differential pressures, worm gears are often employed (Figure 9.2.11.2.-1).
9.2.11.1 Pneumatic actuator Type 3277 with handwheel
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
3
4
5
6
7
8
6.1
10
11
2
16
26
27
28
8.1
9
2 Actuator stem
3 Vent plug
4 Loading press. connection
5 Top diaphragm case
6 Springs
6.1 Additional springs
7 Diaphragm plate
8 Diaphragm
9 Nuts and bolts
10 Bottom diaphragm case
11 Loading press. connection
12 Stem seal
12.1 Dry bearing
13 Wiper
15 Ring nut
17 Handwheel
20 Lock nut
21 Flange part
22 Coupling
23 Clamping sleeve
24 Ring
25 Coupling nut
26 Threaded pin
27 Spindle with nut
Neutral position
Pointer points to groove in
coupling [22]
Figure 9.2.11.1.-1: Type 3277 Actuator with additional handwheel
Actuator with Handwheel
Top mounted handwheel for actuator sizes:
240, 350, and 700 cm
2
(only for initial spring value 2.1 bar)
Side mounted handwheel for actuator sizes: 1000, 1400, and 2800 cm
2
Additional features same as standard Type 3271.
Throttling or on / off service
In throttling service, the pneumatic actuators can be used for supply pressures up to
max. 6 bar.
In on / off service, the supply pressure must be restricted. For fail-safe action Actuator
stem retracts, the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench
range value by more than 3 bar. (See Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN)
Table 9.2.11.1.-2: Actuator with Handwheel
For example: Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-7
Figure 9.2.11.1.-3: Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-7 for Heat Transfer Oil
with welding ends. Bellows seal, Handwheel, and Positioner Type 3730-X
9.2.11.2 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 with side-mounted
Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 with side-mounted handwheel for max. 80 mm travel, up to 80 kN
Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 1400 and 2800 cm
2
version for travel 60 to 160 mm, up to 150 kN
Figure 9.2.11.2.-1: Hand-operated Actuators
9.2.11.3 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 attached to Type 3241 Valve
Hand-operated actuator for attachment to valves, especially for Series 3240, 3250, and
3280 Control Valves. Rated travels of 15 and 30 mm Nominal thrusts up to 32 kN.
Spindle force versus manual force diagram
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
Handwheel 250 mm
Handwheel 180 mm
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
Fs kN
Spindle force
F
H
N
Manual force 230
M
a
x
.

m
a
n
u
a
l

f
o
r
c
e

a
c
c
.

t
o

D
I
N

3
2
3
0
Technical data
Type 3273-1 3273-2
Rated travel mm 15 / 30
Maximum travel mm 23 / 38
Maximum thrust kN 18 32
Req. manual force N 230 300
Max. temperature C 100
Figure 9.2.11.3.-1: Type 3273 Hand-
operated Actuator attached to Type 3241
The Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator is a
spindle actuator equipped with a non-rising
handwheel.
Special features
Low overall height
Simple connection to the control valve
Manual forces specified in DIN 3230,
Part 2
Locking mechanism securing the valve
stem position against accidental adjustment
Replaceable with a pneumatic or electric
actuator
3
2
1
4
5
6
Figure 9.2.11.3.-2: Sectional view Type 3273
9.2.12. Actuator Selection with AC-Trim
For Control Valves with AC-Trim it is important to note that over-travel with this trim is
not possible.
This is only achieved by using one of the following methods.
For valves with safety position CLOSED (Stem Extends) the springs should be selected
with the maximum amount of pretension (example: for 15 mm valve travel with actuator
diameter 350 cm
2
, nominal bench range 0.4 to 2.0 bar, the operating range 0.8 to 2.4
bar should be selected).
For valves with safety position OPEN (Stem Retracts) the beginning of the nominal
bench range should be selected (example: for 15 mm valve travel with actuator
diameter 700 cm
2
, nominal bench range 0.2 to 1.0 bar, the operating range 0.2 to 0.6
bar should be selected).
This selection is important so that with larger actuator sizes the actuator force can be
precisely set and the same time, the plug does not come completely out of the seat.
Sectional view of AC-1 Trim
Sectional view of AC-2 Trim
with four attenuation plates
Principle of operation
The medium flows in the flow-to-open direction through the valve. The valve plug
determines the cross-sectional area of flow. The C
v
coefficient is adapted over the
plug and, if necessary, using a combination of attenuation plates upstream of the seat.
To avoid vibrations, the plug is double guided by a guide bushing at the top and a
second guide in the seat.
Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated
technical Data Sheet T 8083-1 EN.
Figure 9.2.12.-1: AC-Trims
9.2.13. Control valves in case of fire
An essential part of equipment safety is the fail-safe
position to be maintained when a fire breaks out.
In case of pneumatic linear actuators, the fail-safe
position must be assumed and maintained when air
supply fails or the diaphragm ruptures.
Usually, springs are used to perform this task. They
force the valve to move to the fail safe position when
dangerous situations emerge or damages occur.
The springs act against the pressure of the process
medium to move the valve to the fail-safe position
upon failure of air supply, and keep it in this position.
When a fire breaks out, the fail-safe position of the
pneumatic actuator will be negatively affected. The
high temperatures cause the springs to lose their
force. With time passing by and temperatures rising,
the springs can no longer keep the valve in its fail-
safe position. In case of fail-safe action Fail-close,
increasing leakage cannot be avoided.
Figure 9.2.13.-2 shows how a pre loaded spring
loses its force under the influence of temperature.
S
p
r
i
n
g

F
o
r
c
e

N
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r

C
5 10 15 20 25 Time min.
T C
0
800
600
400
200
Figure 9.2.13.-2: Force - temperature - time - diagram, loss of spring force
Figure 9.2.13.-1: Control valve with
pneumatic actuator
Shortly after the fire has broken out, the spring force decreases considerably. As a result,
the ability to keep the valve in fail-safe position during the fire will be lost within a short
period.
The loss of rigidity and the considerable decrease of force are caused by re crystallization
processes within the material structure of the spring.
The use of conventional fire protection systems, such as coatings, do not provide decisive
advantages since springs are moving components and subject to dynamic stress. Coatings
cannot sufficiently retard the loss of force either.
9.2.13.1 Safety cartridge
The problems discussed above were solved by developing a thermostatic system. This
passive system was supposed to recognize non-typical temperature rises and respond
to them actively. A quite simple element, a cartridge, was developed to perform this task.
This cartridge consists of two cylinders sliding freely within each other. It is flled with
intumescent material which can be composed in such a way that it determines the
release temperature within certain boundaries and, of course, the increase in force it
exerts.
F
After temprature increase Initial state
+ Temperature
Figure 9.2.13.1.-1: Schematic of safety cartridge
The cartridge is made up of a two-piece cylindrical case. The enclosed cylindrical
chamber contains the intumescent material. This material is composed in a special way
to ensure activation of the cartridge before the diaphragm of the pneumatic actuator is
destroyed. The increase in volume causes the cylinders to move in opposing directions.
During this process, considerable forces are developed. The operating direction of the
cylinders corresponds to that of the springs, thus opposing their gradual loss in strength.
Installed in actuators with safety equipment [5], these patented cartridges ensure
decreasing spring force compensation.
RESTRICTIONS
Only at standard actuators and environmental temperatures up to 80 C (degrees
Celsius) and at the moment only to absorption area of 700 cm
2
available.
Force N
Time min. 0 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
5000
3000
1000
C
a
r
t
r
i
d
g
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
in
fo
rc
e
Figure 9.2.13.1.-2: Force of the safety cartridge increasing over time; after heating in accordance with the
unit-temperature curve
The safety cartridge is heated according to the unit-temperature curve in which the
development of temperature over time is plotted in accordance with DIN 4102, Part 8 [6].
1000
K
500
0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time min.
Figure 9.2.13.1.-3: Unit-temperature curve
The design of this irreversibly operating cartridge is simple and allows retrofitting of
already installed pneumatic actuators.
To do this, the safety cartridge must be installed in the center of the actuator springs. The
mounting position of the pneumatic actuator is not important, the cartridge can always
perform its task of closing the valve in the event of a fire.
The selected overall length of the cartridge does not affect the travel or operating range
of the springs at standard ambient temperatures. Only in the event of a fire does the
cartridge become effective, reacting to the unusually high temperatures.
9.2.13.2 Fire-Safe / Fire lock
Figure 9.2.13.2.-1: Safety cartridge in deactivated state
Simple equipment or refitting
Fast and reliable reaction
Installation position independence
Working direction reversible
Figure 9.2.13.2.-2: Safety cartridge after temperature increase.
The cartridge blocks the actuator in the desired safety position before the springs take
damage. Valve remains opened or closed depending on function.
9.2.13.3 Simulation of a fire
A control valve equipped with such a safety cartridge was subjected to a simulated fre.
Technical data of the control valve used in the simulation:
Valve:
SAMSON, Type 3241, nominal size DN 25, nominal pressure PN 40
Characteristic: equal percentage
Valve plug: lapped-in-metal
Plug material: Cr steel, WN 1.4006
Seat material: Cr steel, WN 1.4006
Body material: GS-C 25, WN 1.0619
Actuator:
SAMSON, Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator
Effective diaphragm area: 350 cm
Actuator stem extends
Signal pressure range: 0.6 to 3 bar
Material: St 1203
Diaphragm: NBR with polyester fabric
The test aimed at maintaining the tightness of the valve over 30 minutes minimum
with constant system pressure acting on the valve. The time span is based on the
specifcations given in BSI 6755/2 [7].
The test valve described above was heated in a test room according to the unit
temperature curve. The pneumatic actuator was equipped with 6 cartridges installed in
the actuator spring assemblies. The valve contained water. During the heating phase,
steam was produced. A pressure regulator installed outside the test room maintained a
constant system pressure of 30 bar. Prior to starting the test, a pump had been used to
produce this pressure. Downstream of the seat/plug restriction area, the valve was open
to atmosphere.
The temperature in the test room and the pneumatic actuator was measured via
thermocouples.
The temperature increase over time in the test room and in the pneumatic actuator
was correspondent to the unit-temperature curve (see Figure 9.2.13.1.-3). The system
pressure of 30 bar in the valve upstream of the seat remained constant during the entire
test procedure.
As was expected, the rubber diaphragm was completely destroyed at the end of the
test. With the exception of the springs, none of the metallic components showed any
visible damages or deformations.
The task, to provide tight shut-off against the pressure of 30 bar prevailing throughout
the test and during the high temperatures of the fre, could be fulflled over the entire
period of temperature supply.
9.2.13.4 Reversible operating direction
Apart from the safety cartridges, there are additional solutions that can be integrated
in the pneumatic actuator for safety. It is possible to use a pre loaded spring assembly
released at an adjustable temperature to oppose the standard fail-safe position. This
patented method [8] includes pre loaded spring discs which act in opposition to the
standard actuator springs. The spring discs are bound by a solder strip. The type of
solder determines at which temperature the spring discs are released to act as an
additional safety device. Upon release of the spring discs, the standard fail-safe action
is reversed. The solder joint is extremely stable under practical operating conditions,
such as permanently increased ambient temperatures.
A pneumatic actuator equipped with such a safety device is presented in the sectional
drawing below.
Figure 9.2.13.4.-1: Sectional drawing of a pneumatic actuator whose standard fail-safe action is reversed
in the event of a fire. The release temperature range of the spring discs bound by a solder strip depends
on the kind of solder used.
9.2.13.5 Summary
The safety equipment shows a simple structure, enabling the pneumatic control valve to
assume fail-safe position or reverse this fail-safe position upon outbreak of fire. Pneumatic
control valves could now be used in fields of application never considered possible before.
Compared to pneumatic control valves with standard fail-safe action, actuators equipped
with these innovative safety devices are able to maintain the fail-safe position over an
extended period of time when exposed to fire.
The safety cartridge filled with intumescent material plays an essential role in this safety
technique. Thanks to these cartridges, the valve trim remains effective even at the
extremely high temperatures of a fire, thus preventing leakage of hazardous media! The
cartridges compensate for the loss in force of the springs, which under less extreme
conditions guarantee fail-safe action.
Another asset of the safety equipment is its cost-effectiveness compared to other safety
equipment in use. Since the safety cartridges can replace more complex and hence
expensive safety devices, they will prove to be another remedy against the pressure on
costs.
Alternatively, conventional fail-safe action can be reversed when a fire breaks out.
Releasing pre loaded and bound spring discs reverses the direction of standard fail-safe
action of pneumatic actuators. An important aspect in this innovative method is the fact
that the temperature range in which the springs are released can be adjusted as needed.
In view of all the advantages of the modern safety equipment developed by SAMSON,
the use of pneumatic control valves could now be taken into consideration even where
sensitive applications are concerned.
Bibliography
[1] Schneider, W. 1992. Der Metallbalg, ein zuverlssiges Dichtelement in
Stellgerten. In Chemietechnik, No. 3: 54-60
[2] Schneider, W., und Bartscher, H. 1988. Stellgerte im Rtteltest.
Chemie-Anlagen-Verfahren, No. 8: 84-90
[3] Kiesbauer, J., und H. Hoffmann 1998. Verbesserte Prozezuverlssigkeit und
Wartung mittels digitaler Stellungsregler. Automatisierungstechnische Praxis,
Vol 40, No. 2: 22-34
[4] Vogel, U. 1991. Trends in der Stellgerteentwicklung.
Chemie-Anlagen-Verfahren: 59-62
[5] SAMSON AG. 1994. Stellantrieb mit Sicherheitseinrichtung.
Patentschrift DE 42 39 580 C2
[6] DIN 4102, Brandverhalten von Baustoffen und Bauteilen
[7] BSI 6755/2, Testing of valves, Part 2 1987. Specification for fire type-testing
requirements
[8] SAMSON AG. 1997. Pneumatisch bettigbare Antriebseinheit.
Patentschrift DE 196 49 440 C1
9.2.14. Overview of actuators Type 3271-52, 3271-5, and 3277-5 up to a diaphragm
area 120 cm
2
.
Type 3271-52 3271-5
2
120 cm
2
Rated travel 7.5 mm 7.5 mm
Linear actuators
in particular for
attachment to
Micro-flow Valves
Type 3510.
Type 3271-52 3271-5 3277-5
2
120 cm
2
120 cm
2
Rated travel 7.5 mm 15 mm 15 mm
Linear actuators
in particular for
attachment to
Valves Series 3240
and Micro-flow
Valves Type 3510.
Type 3271-5 3277-5
2
120 cm
2
Rated travel 15 mm 15 mm
Version with
Handwheel.
Linear actuators
in particular for
attachment to
Control Valves
Series 3240 and
Micro-flow Valves
Type 3510.
Figure 9.2.14.-1: Linear actuators Type 3271-52, 3271-5, and 3277-5
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271-52
2
The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs.
Effective diaphragm area 60 cm
2
Maximum supply pressure 6 bar
Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO
Rated travel 7.5 mm
Bench range Various bench ranges by varying the
number of springs or their compression.
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases Aluminum, powder-varnish coated
Permissible operating temperatures NBR 35 to +80 C
Actuator versions
Figure 9.2.14.-2: Actuators Type 3271-52 of 60 cm
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271-5
2
2
Rated travel 7.5 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish coated
Actuator versions
Additional handwheel, Data Sheet T 8312 EN
Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable.
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271-5
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish
coated.
Actuator versions
Additional handwheel
Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277-5
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
coated.
Actuator versions
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271-5 with Handwheel
2
2
Rated travel
120 cm
2
7.5 mm
120 cm
2
15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
coated.
Permissible operating temperatures
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
Figure 9.2.14.-6: Actuators Type 3271-5 with Handwheel of 120 cm
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277-5 with Handwheel
2
2
Rated travel
7.5 mm
15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
coated.
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
Figure 9.2.14.-7: Actuators Type 3277-5 with Handwheel of 120 cm
2
for Globe Valves
2
.
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2
240 cm
2
Linear actuator in
particular for attachment to
Series 3240, 3250,
and 3280 Control Valves.
Type 3271
2
355 cm
2
Linear actuator in
Series 3240, 3250,
Type 3271
2
1000 cm
2
Linear actuator in
Series 3240, 3250,
Figure 9.2.15.-1: Actuators Type 3271 of 240 cm
2
to 1000 cm
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2
2
Rated travel 80 cm
2
15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Up to 80 C in Fire-Lock version
Actuator versions
Optional stainless steel version (made of 1.4301)
Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas of 80 Data Sheet T 8312 EN
Fire-Lock version fail-safe action in case of fire
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated
Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9)
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
Additional handwheel, Data Sheet T 8312 EN
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
Optional stainless steel version made of WN 1.4301
,
Data Sheet T 8312 EN
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2
2
Rated travel 30 mm
Bench range
Various bench ranges by varying the
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions

Data Sheet T 8312 EN
Fire-Lock version fail-safe action in case of fire.
technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2
2
Rated travel 30 mm
Bench range
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
Additional handwheel Data Sheet T 8312 EN
technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN
2
for Globe Valves
9.2.16. Overview of the actuators of 1400 cm
2
up to a diaphragm area 2 x 2800
cm
2
.
Type 3271
2
1400 cm
2
Linear actuator
in particular for
attachment to
Series 3240, 3250,
and 3280 Control
Valves.
Type 3271
2
2 x 2800 cm
2
Rated travel 120 mm
Linear actuator
in particular for
attachment to
Series 3240, 3250,
and 3280 Control
Valves.
2
, 2800 cm
2
, and 2 x 2800 cm
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
1400 cm
2
2
Rated travel
60 mm
120 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for travels up to 160 mm using side-
mounted handwheel effective diaphragm areas of 1400 cm
2

Actuator with travel stop, minimum or maximum travel mechanically adjustable for
1400 cm
2
actuators with 60 mm travel.
technical Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3271
2800 cm
2
2
Rated travel 2800 cm
2
120 mm
Bench range
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
mounted handwheel effective diaphragm areas of 2800 cm
2

2800 cm
2
actuators.
Figure 9.2.16.-3: Actuator Type 3271 of 2800 cm
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuator
Type 3271
2 x 2800 cm
2
Actuator versions
mounted handwheel.
2 x 2800 cm
2
tandem actuators.
Figure 9.2.16.-4: Actuator Type 3271 of 2 x 2800 cm
2
for Globe Valves
2
.
Type 3277-5 3277
2
240 cm
2
Linear actuator in
Series 3240, 3250,
and 3280 Control Valves
Type 3277 3277
2
355 cm
2
Linear actuator in
Series 3240, 3250,
Type 3277 3277
2
1000 cm
2
Linear actuator in
Series 3240, 3250,
Figure 9.2.17.-1: SAMSON Actuators Type 3277 of 120 cm
2
to 1000 cm
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277-5
120 cm
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
Bench range
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
coated.
Actuator versions
Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas
For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data
sheet. Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277
240 cm
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
Bench range
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277
350 cm
2
2
Rated travel 15 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277
355 cm
2
2
Rated travel 30 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277
700 cm
2
2
and 1000 cm
2
Rated travel 30 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
Diaphragm cases
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas 700 cm
2
2
for Globe Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Type 3277
1000 cm
2
2
Rated travel 60 mm
(See Table 9.2.22.1.-1)
Number of springs
NBR 35 to +90 C
EDPM 50 to +120 C
Actuator versions
sheet.
2
for Globe Valves
9.2.18. Overview of Actuators Type 3371, 3372, Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2
Type 2780-1 2780-2
2
120 cm
2
Rated travel 6 / 12 / 15 mm 6 / 12 / 15 mm
Versatile actuators
Type 2780-1 and Type 2780-2
for use in heating, ventilation and air-
conditioning systems as well as for
mechanical engineering.
Type 3371 3371
2
350 cm
2
Actuators Type 3371, and 3372 only
for Valve Series V2001.
Type 3371 only for valve size
DN 15 to 50 / NPS to 2 (left),
DN 65 to 100 / 2 to 4 (right).
Type 3372 3372
2
120 cm
2
Actuators Type 3371 and 3372 only
for Valve Series V2001.
Type 3372 only for valve size
DN 15 to 50 / NPS to 2.
With integrated i/p positioner,
Valve CLOSED (left),
Valve OPEN (right).
Figure 9.2.18.-1: Versatile actuators for use in heating, ventilation and air-conditioning as well as for
mechanical engineering.
9.2.19. Actuators Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2
The Type 2780 Pneumatic Actuators are diaphragm-type actuators with internal
compression springs. They are suitable for attachment to SAMSON Type 3213 and Type
3222 Globe Valves and to Type 3226 and Type 3260 Three-way Valves.
Pneumatic Actuator
Type 2780-1
Actuator stem
extends retracts
Nominal size DN 15 to 50 (G to G1)
2
Fail-safe action Reversible
Rated travel
DN 15 to 25
G to G1
6 mm
DN 32 to 50 12 mm
Bench range
Type 2780-1 0.4 to 1 bar
Type 2780-2 0.4 to 2 bar
Supply air pressure required 2.4 bar
Number of springs
3
6 springs for 0.4 to 2 bar bench range and
12 mm rated travel.
Ambient temperature -10 to + 80 C
sheet. (See Data Sheet T 5840 EN)
Figure 9.2.19.-1: Actuators Type 2780-1
Pneumatic Actuator
Type 2780-2
Actuator stem
extends retracts
Nominal size DN 15 to 50 (G to G1)
2
Fail-safe action Reversible
Rated travel
DN 15 to 25
G to G1
6 mm
DN 32 to 50 12 mm
Bench range
Type 2780-1 0.4 to 1 bar
Type 2780-2 0.4 to 2 bar
Supply air pressure required 2.4 bar
Number of springs
3
6 springs for 0.4 to 2 bar bench range and
12 mm rated travel.
Ambient temperature -10 to + 80 C
sheet. (See Data Sheet T 5840 EN)
Figure 9.2.19.-2: Actuators Type 2780-2
Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3222 with Actuator Type 2780
Globe Valve Type 3222/2780-2 with positioner
(Version with welding ends)
Globe Valve Type 3222/2780-1
(Male thread connection)
9.2.20. Pneumatic Actuators Type 3371 and Electropneumatic Actuators Type
3372
The actuators are designed for attachment to Series V 2001 Valves (Type 3321, Type
3323, Type 3531, Type 3535, Type 3214 (DN 65 to 100) and Type 3260 (DN 65 and 80).
8.7
8.6
14
14
8.9
8.8
8.7
8.6
8.5
8.1
8.2
7
6
16
1
15
8.4
8.3
i
p
10
10.1
11
12
13
14
i
Figure 9.2.20.-1: Pneumatic and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372
Type 3372 / 120 cm
2

Integrated positioner actuator stem extends
Type 3372 / 120 cm
2
Integrated positioner actuator stem retracts
Type 3371 / 120 cm
2
Type 3371 / 350 cm
2
Type 3372 / 120 cm
2
with Type 3730 Positioner
actuator stem extends / retracts
Type 3372 / 350 cm
2
with Type 3730 Positioner
actuator stem extends / retracts
Table 9.2.20.-2: Pneumatic Actuators Type 3371 and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372
9.2.20.1 Technical data Pressures in psi and bar
Valve / Actuator Type 3321-IP / Type 3372 Type 3321-PP / Type 3371
Actuator area 120 cm
2
350 cm
2

(NPS 2 and
larger)
120 cm
2
350 cm
2

(NPS 2 and
larger)
Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN
Reference variable 4 to 20 mA
Bench range
Rated travel
Valve
CLOSED
30 to 48 psi
15 mm
(2.1 to 3.3 bar)
32 to 55 psi
30 mm
(2.2 to 3.8 bar)
30 to 48 psi
15 mm
(2.1 to 3.3 bar)
32 to 55 psi
30 mm
(2.2 to 3.8 bar)
Valve
OPEN
6 to 20 psi
15 mm
(0.4 to 1.4 bar)
22 to 39 psi
30 mm
(1.5 to 2.7 bar)
6 to 20 psi
15 mm
(0.4 to 1.4 bar)
22 to 39 psi
30 mm
(1.5 to 2.7 bar)
Characteristic
Linear, deviation from terminal-based
conformity 2 %
Hysteresis 1 %
Variable position 7 %
Degree of protection
IP 54 with integrated positioner
(for 120 cm
2
only)
IP 66 with positioner Type 3730-0 /-1
Permissible ambient
temperature
Standard: 4 to 176 F (20 to 80 C)
with metal cable gland:
22 to 176 F (30 to 80 C)
31 to 194 F (35 to 90 C)
Note:
For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated
technical data sheet.
Table 9.2.20.1.-1: Technical data for Actuators Type 3371 and 3372
Globe Valve Type 3321-IP
DN 15 to 50 / NPS to 2,
actuator with integrated
electropneumatic positioner
Globe Valve Type 3321
DN 15 to 50
NPS to 2
DN 65 to 100
NPS 2 to 4
Figure 9.2.20.1.-2: Valve Series V2001 - Globe Valve Type 3321
9.2.21. The cost-efficient positioner Type 3725
Main Features
Convenient on site operation via capacitive
buttons and LC display
Convenient operation philosophy via proven
3730-1 operation structure
Internal contact less position sensing based
on the 3738-20 platform, ideal to prevent
problems caused through steam hammers
Travel pick up with lever on the backside assure
to a seamless mounting adaption
2 optional NAMUR limit switches
Convenient mounting kits for
3372 (V2001)
Direct attachment up to 700 cm2
Rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845
Type 3321-IP Electropneumatic Globe Valve
with Type 3372 Electropneumatic Actuator,
optionally with integrated positioner (120 cm
only, with plug connector), or
Type 3725 or
Type 3730-0 or
Type 3730-1,
tight-closing function for completely venting or
filling the actuator with air, reference variable 4
to 20 mA, max. 90 psi (6 bar) supply air,
fail-safe position valve CLOSED or valve
OPEN,
optionally with limit switches
Figure 9.2.21.-1: Type 3321-IP Electropneumatic Globe
Valve
9.2.22. Operating travels for fail-safe action
Supplementary specifications for Type 3271 and Type 3277 Actuators (up to 700 cm
2
)
Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS
Actuators for fail-safe action actuator stem extended by spring force
Comparison between bench ranges and preferred operating travels
(depending on operating travel)
Spring return force at 0 mm travel
Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS
Actuators for fail-safe action actuator stem retracted by spring force
Comparison between bench ranges and preferred operating travels
(depending on operating travel)
Description of color markings
Actuators with special springs. Use only in special cases. e.g. with
mounting bracket for butterfly valves or 120 % operating travels.
No handwheel available
Operating ranges with top-mounted handwheel, (with 700 cm
2

diaphragms, the upper spring range value is limited to 3.3 bar)
Type 3273 with small side-mounted handwheel
(80 mm travel, max. thrust 80 kN).
Not with Type 3241 in DN 100 / NPS 4 to DN 150 / NPS 6 in
combination with an insulating or bellows section.
Cannot be used for mounting brackets for butterfly valves.
Type 3273 with large side-mounted handwheel
(150 mm travel, max. thrust 150 kN)
Selection of the handwheel depends on the required thrust. Up to 80 kN
small side-mounted handwheel (as a result, the max. supply pressure or
upper spring range value for 2800 cm
2
diaphragms is 3 bar). Large side-
mounted handwheel for thrusts between 80 kN and 150 kN.
Note:
With fail-safe action actuator stem retracts and on/off service, the permissible
supply pressure must not exceed the upper spring range value by more than 3 bar.
With fail-safe action actuator stem extends and travel stops on both sides, the
permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper spring range value by more
than 1.5 bar.
For Type 3241 Valves in DN 50 / NPS 2, the maximum operating travel is 110 %.
9.2.22.1 Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]

-

T
y
p
e
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
M
a
x
.

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

s
p
r
i
n
g
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

s
p
r
i
n
g

p
r
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

[

%

]

7.5 mm
Operating travel
15 mm
Operating travel
19 mm
Operating travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

[

b
a
r

]

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
60
Type
3271- 52
60 7.5 0.2 to 1.0 10.5 2 0 0.20 1.00 0.12
60 7.5 0.4 to 2.0 10.5 4 0 0.40 2.00 0.24
60 7.5 1.4 to 2.3 10.5 4 0 1.40 2.30 0.84
60 7.5 2.1 to 3.3 10.5 8 0 2.10 3.30 1.26
120
Type
3271-5
120 7.5 0.4 to 0.8 9 3 0 - - 0.48
120 7.5 0.8 to 1.6 9 6 0 - - 0.96
120 7.5 1.7 to 2.1 9 6 0 1.70 2.10 2.04
120 7.5 2.4 to 3.0 9 12 0 2.40 3.00 2.88
120
3271-5
3277-5
120 15 0.2 to 1.0 16 3 0 0.60 1.00 0.72 0.20 1.00 0.24
120 15 0.4 to 2.0 16 6 0 1.20 2.00 1.44 0.40 2.00 0.48
120 15 1.4 to 2.3 15 6 0 1.85 2.30 2.22 1.40 2.30 1.68
120 15 2.1 to 3.3 15 12 0 2.70 3.30 3.24 2.10 3.30 2.52
240
Type
3271
240 15 0.2 to 1.0 17 3 12.5 0.70 1.10 1.68 0.30 1.10 0.48
240 15 0.4 to 2.0 17 6 12.5 1.40 2.20 3.36 0.60 2.20 0.96
240 15 0.6 to 3.0 17 12 12.5 2.10 3.30 5.04 0.90 3.30 1.44
350
Type
3271
350 15 0.2 to 1.0 22 3 25 0.80 1.20 2.80 0.40 1.20 0.70
350 15 0.4 to 2.0 22 6 25 1.60 2.40 5.60 0.80 2.40 1.40
350 15 0.6 to 3.0 22 12 25 2.40 3.60 8.40 1.20 3.60 2.10
350 15 1.4 to 2.3 15 6 0 1.85 2.30 6.48 1.40 2.30 4.90
350 15 2.1 to 3.3 15 12 0 2.70 3.30 9.45 2.10 3.30 7.35
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]

-

T
y
p
e
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
M
a
x
.

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

s
p
r
i
n
g
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

s
p
r
i
n
g

p
r
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

[

%

]

7.5 mm
Operating travel
15 mm
Operating travel
19 mm
Operating travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

[

b
a
r

]

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
355
Type
3277
355 30 0.2 to 1.0 38 3 25 1.00 1.20 3.55 0.40 1.20 2.84
355 30 0.4 to 2.0 38 6 25 2.00 2.40 7.10 0.80 2.40 5.68
355 30 0.6 to 3.0 38 12 25 3.00 3.60 10.65 1.20 3.60 8.52
700
Type
3271
3277
700 30 0.2 to 1.0 38 3 30 1.00 1.20 7.00 0.80 1.20 5.60
700 30 0.4 to 2.0 38 6 30 2.00 2.40 14.00 1.60 2.40 11.20 1.40 2.40 9.80
700 30 0.6 to 3.0 38 12 30 3.00 3.60 21.00 2.40 3.60 16.80 2.10 3.60 14.70
700 30 1.4 to 2.3 30 8 0 2.10 2.30 14.70 1.85 2.30 12.95
700 30 2.1 to 3.3 30 12 0 3.00 3.30 21.00 2.70 3.30 18.90 2.50 3.30 17.50
700 30
2.35 to
3.8
30 15 0 3.40 3.80 23.80 3.05 3.80 21.35
700 30 2.6 to 4.3 30 18 0 3.90 4.30 27.30 3.45 4.30 24.15
Table 9.2.22.1.-1: Signal pressure range at operating travel 7.5 to 19 mm
Note:
Signal pressure range 1.4 to 2.4 bar at operating travel 19 mm
Globe Valve Type 3241 DN 80, K
vs
/C
v100
-Value 100/120.
(No Metal-Bellows construction, no Flow Divider I)
vs
/C
v100
-Value 100/120.
vs
/C
v100
-Value 100/120.
Large sideways handwheel on inquiry
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
M
a
x
.

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

s
p
r
i
n
g
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

s
p
r
i
n
g

p
r
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

[

%

]

15 mm
Operating travel
30 mm
Operating travel
60 mm
Operating travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
80
Type
3271
3277
80 15 0.2 to 1.0 16 3 12.5 0.30 1.10 0.24
80 15 0.4 to 2.0 16 6 12.5 0.60 2.20 0.48
80 15 0.6 to 3.0 16 12 12.5 0.90 3.30 0.72
120
Type
3271
3277
120 15 0.2 to 1.0 16 3 0 0.20 1.00 0.24
120 15 0.4 to 2.0 16 6 0 0.40 2.00 0.48
120 15 1.4 to 2.3 15 6 0 1.40 2.30 1.68
120 15 2.1 to 3.3 15 12 0 2.10 3.30 2.52
240
Type
3271
3277
240 15 0.2 to 1.0 17 3 12.5 0.30 1.10 0.72
240 15 0.4 to 2.0 17 6 12.5 0.60 2.20 1.40
240 15 0.6 to 3.0 17 12 12.5 0.90 3.30 2.16
350
Type
3271
350 15 0.2 to 1.0 22 3 25 0.40 1.20 1.40
350 15 0.4 to 2.0 22 6 25 0.80 2.40 2.80
350 15 0.6 to 3.0 22 12 25 1.20 3.60 4.20
350 15 1.4 to 2.3 15 6 0 1.40 2.30 4.90
350 15 2.1 to 3.3 15 12 0 2.10 3.30 7.35
350 15 0.45 to 0.7 22 3 25 0.50 0.75 1.75
350 15 0.9 to 1.4 22 6 25 1.00 1.50 3.50
350 15 1.15 to 1.85 22 9 25 1.30 2.00 4.55
350 15 1.6 to 2.9 22 18 25 2.00 3.30 7.00
350 15 1.7 to 3.2 22 24 25 2.10 3.60 7.35
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
M
a
x
.

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

s
p
r
i
n
g
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

s
p
r
i
n
g

p
r
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

[

%

]

15 mm
Operating travel
30 mm
Operating travel
60 mm
Operating travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
355
Type
3277
355 30 0.2 to 1.0 38 3 25 0.80 1.20 2.84 0.40 1.20 1.42
355 30 0.4 to 2.0 38 6 25 1.60 2.40 5.68 0.80 2.40 2.84
355 30 0.6 to 3.0 38 12 25 2.40 3.60 8.52 1.20 3.60 4.26
355 30 0.9 to 1.7 38 4 25 1.50 1.90 5.33 1.10 1.90 3.91
355 30 1.4 to 2.6 38 8 25 2.35 2.95 8.34 1.75 2.95 6.21
355 30 1.9 to 3.3 38 10 25 2.95 3.65 10.47 2.25 3.65 7.99
700
Type
3271
3277
700 30 0.2 to 1.0 38 3 30 0.80 1.20 5.60 0.40 1.20 2.80
700 30 0.4 to 2.0 38 6 30 1.60 2.40 11.20 0.80 2.40 5.60
700 30 0.6 to 3.0 38 12 30 2.40 3.60 16.80 1.20 3.60 8.40
700 30 1.4 to 2.3 30 8 0 1.85 2.30 12.95 1.40 2.30 9.80
700 30 2.1 to 3.3 30 12 0 2.70 3.30 18.90 2.10 3.30 14.70
700 30 2.35 to 3.8 30 15 0 3.05 3.80 21.35 2.35 3.80 16.45
700 30 2.6 to 4.3 30 18 0 3.45 4.30 24.15 2.60 4.30 18.20
700 30 0.35 to 0.45 38 3 30
700 30 0.7 to 0.9 38 6 30
700 30 1.0 to 1.35 38 9 30
700 30 1.3 to 1.8 38 12 30 1.45 1.95 10.15
700 30 1.7 to 2.6 38 18 30 2.45 2.90 17.15 2.00 2.90 14.00
700 30 1.9 to 3.3 38 24 30 3.10 3.80 21.70 2.40 3.80 16.80
700 30 2.0 to 3.6 38 30 30 3.30 4.10 23.10 2.50 4.10 17.50
1000
Type
3271
1000 60 0.4 to 2.0 80 6 25 2.00 2.40 20.00 1.60 2.40 16.00 0.80 2.40 8.00
1000 60 0.6 to 3.0 80 9 25 3.00 3.60 30.00 2.40 3.60 24.00 1.20 3.60 12.00
1000 60 0.8 to 2.8 80 9 25 2.80 3.30 28.00 2.30 3.30 23.00 1.30 3.30 13.00
1000 60 1.0 to 3.2 80 10 25 3.10 3.70 31.00 2.60 3.70 26.00 1.50 3.70 15.00
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
M
a
x
.

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

s
p
r
i
n
g
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

s
p
r
i
n
g

p
r
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

[

%

]

15 mm
Operating travel
30 mm
Operating travel
60 mm
Operating travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
1400-
60
Type
3271
1400 60 0.2 to 1.0 80 6 25 1.00 1.20 14.00 0.80 1.20 11.20 0.40 1.20 5.60
1400 60 0.4 to 2.0 80 12 25 2.00 2.40 28.00 1.60 2.40 22.40 0.80 2.40 11.20
1400 60 0.5 to 2.5 80 18 25 2.50 3.00 35.00 2.00 3.00 28.00 1.00 3.00 14.00
1400 60 0.5 to 0.95 80 6 25 0.60 1.05 8.40
1400 60 0.7 to 1.4 80 9 25 0.85 1.55 11.90
1400 60 0.85 to 1.8 80 12 25 1.55 2.00 21.70 1.05 2.00 14.70
1400 60 1.1 to 2.4 80 18 25 2.40 2.70 33.60 2.05 2.70 28.70 1.40 2.70 19.60
1400 60 1.3 to 2.8 80 24 25 2.80 3.20 39.20 2.45 3.20 34.30 1.70 3.20 23.80
1400-
120
Type
3271
1400 120 0.4 to 1.2 130 3 1.00 1.20 14.00 0.80 1.20 11.20
1400 120 0.8 to 2.4 130 6 2.20 2.40 30.80 2.00 2.40 28.00 1.60 2.40 22.40
1400 120 1.0 to 3.0 130 9 2.75 3.00 38.50 2.50 3.00 35.00 2.00 3.00 28.00
1400 120 1.2 to 3.6 130 12 3.30 3.60 46.20 3.00 3.60 42.00 2.40 3.60 33.60
Table 9.2.22.1.-2: Signal pressure range at operating travel 15 to 60 mm
Note:
Special Spring Ranges with Type 3271 Actuators
Special spring ranges are often being used with pneumatic actuators when really standard
spring ranges could be used instead.
The problem often arises when special spring ranges are used that these actuators must
be specially made and the tolerances of the springs are partly inadequate since the
nominal travel of the valve cannot be set.
When at all possible, only the spring ranges listed in the Data Sheet T 8310 should be
used.
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
M
a
x
.

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

s
p
r
i
n
g
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

s
p
r
i
n
g

p
r
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

[

%

]

30 mm
Operating travel
60 mm
Operating travel
120 mm
Operating travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
S
p
r
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

a
t

0

m
m

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

k
N

]
1400-
120
Type
3271
1400 120 0.4 to 1.2 130 3 1.00 1.20 14.00 0.80 1.20 11.20 0.40 1.20 5.60
1400 120 0.8 to 2.4 130 6 2.00 2.40 28.00 1.60 2.40 22.40 0.80 2.40 11.20
1400 120 1.0 to 3.0 130 9 2.50 3.00 35.00 2.00 3.00 28.00 1.00 3.00 14.00
1400 120 1.2 to 3.6 130 12 3.00 3.60 42.00 2.40 3.60 33.60 1.20 3.60 16.80
2800
Type
3271
2800 120 0.2 to 1.0 160 3 25 1.00 1.20 28.00 0.80 1.20 22.40 0.40 1.20 11.20
2800 120 0.4 to 2.0 160 6 25 2.00 2.40 56.00 1.60 2.40 44.80 0.80 2.40 22.40
2800 120 0.5 to 2.5 160 9 25 2.50 3.00 70.00 2.00 3.00 56.00 1.00 3.00 28.00
2800 120 0.6 to 3.0 160 12 25 3.00 3.60 84.00 2.40 3.60 67.20 1.20 3.60 33.60
2800 120 0.8 to 1.7 160 6 25 1.45 1.90 40.60 1.00 1.90 28.00
2800 120 0.9 to 2.2 160 9 25 2.15 2.50 60.20 1.85 2.50 51.80 1.20 2.50 33.60
2800 120 1.0 to 2.7 160 12 25 2.65 3.10 74.20 2.25 3.10 63.00 1.40 3.10 39.20
2800 120 1.1 to 2.3 160 6 25 2.00 2.60 56.00 1.40 2.60 39.20
2800 120 1.2 to 2.8 160 9 25 2.80 3.20 78.40 2.40 3.20 67.20 1.60 3.20 44.80
2800 120 1.3 to 3.3 160 12 25 3.30 3.80 92.40 2.80 3.80 78.40 1.80 3.80 50.40
22800
Type
3271
5600 120 0.2 to 1.0 160 6 25 1.00 1.20 56.00 0.80 1.20 44.80 0.40 1.20 22.40
5600 120 0.4 to 2.0 160 12 25 2.00 2.40 112.00 1.60 2.40 89.60 0.80 2.40 44.80
5600 120 0.5 to 2.5 160 18 25 2.50 3.00 140.00 2.00 3.00 112.00 1.00 3.00 56.00
5600 120 0.6 to 3.0 160 24 25 3.00 3.60 168.00 2.40 3.60 134.40 1.20 3.60 67.20
5600 120 0.8 to 1.7 160 12 25 1.45 1.90 81.20 1.00 1.90 56.00
5600 120 0.9 to 2.2 160 18 25 2.15 2.50 120.40 1.85 2.50 103.60 1.20 2.50 67.20
5600 120 1.0 to 2.7 160 24 25 2.65 3.10 148.40 2.25 3.10 126.00 1.40 3.10 78.40
5600 120 1.1 to 2.3 160 12 25 2.00 2.60 112.00 1.40 2.60 78.40
5600 120 1.2 to 2.8 160 18 25 2.80 3.20 156.80 2.40 3.20 134.40 1.60 3.20 89.60
5600 120 1.3 to 3.3 160 24 25 3.30 3.80 184.80 2.80 3.80 156.80 1.80 3.80 100.80
9.2.22.2 Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
7.5 mm
Operating
travel
15 mm
Operating
travel
19 mm
Operating
travel
30 mm
Operating
travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
60
Type
3271- 52
60 7.5 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 1.00
60 7.5 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 2.00
60 7.5 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 2.30
60 7.5 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 3.30
120
Type
3271-5
120 7.5 0.2 to 1.0 0.40 0.80
120 7.5 0.4 to 2.0 0.80 1.60
120 7.5 1.4 to 2.3 1.70 2.10
120 7.5 2.1 to 3.3 2.40 3.00
120
3271-5
3277-5
120 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
120 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
120 15 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 1.85 1.40 2.30
120 15 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 2.70 2.10 3.30
240
Type 3271
Type 3277
240 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
240 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
240 15 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
350
Type 3271
350 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
350 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
350 15 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
350 15 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 1.85 1.40 2.30
350 15 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 2.70 2.10 3.30
350 15 0.45 to 0.7 0.45 0.70
350 15 0.9 to 1.4 0.90 1.40
350 15 1.15 to 1.85 1.15 1.85
350 15 1.6 to 2.9 1.60 2.90
350 15 1.7 to 3.2 1.70 3.20
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
7.5 mm
Operating
travel
15 mm
Operating
travel
19 mm
Operating
travel
30 mm
Operating
travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
355
Type 3277
355 30 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.40 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
355 30 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
355 30 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.20 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
355 30 0.9 to 1.7 0.90 1.10 0.90 1.30 0.90 1.70
355 30 1.4 to 2.6 1.40 1.70 1.40 2.00 1.40 2.60
355 30 1.9 to 3.3 1.90 2.25 1.90 2.60 1.90 3.30
700
Type
3271
3277
700 30 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.40 0.20 0.60 0.20 0.70 0.20 1.00
700 30 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20 0.40 1.40 0.40 2.00
700 30 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.20 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
700 30 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 1.60 1.40 1.85 1.40 2.30
700 30 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 2.40 2.10 2.70 2.10 3.30
700 30 2.35 to 3.8 2.35 2.70 2.35 3.05 2.35 3.80
700 30 2.6 to 4.3 2.60 3.00 2.60 3.45 2.60 4.30
700 30 0.35 to 0.45
700 30 0.7 to 0.9
700 30 1.0 to 1.35
700 30 1.3 to 1.8 1.30 1.80
700 30 1.7 to 2.6 1.70 2.15 1.70 2.60
700 30 1.9 to 3.3 1.90 2.60 1.90 3.30
700 30 2.0 to 3.6 2.00 2.80 2.00 3.60
Table 9.2.22.2.-1: Signal pressure range at operating travel 7.5 to 30 mm
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
15 mm
Operating
travel
30 mm
Operating
travel
60 mm
Operating
travel
120 mm
Operating
travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
80
Type
3271
3277
80 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 1.00
80 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 2.00
80 15 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 3.00
120
Type
3271
3277
120 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 1.00
120 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 2.00
120 15 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 2.30
120 15 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 3.30
240
Type
3271
3277
240 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 1.00
240 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 2.00
240 15 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 3.00
350
Type
3271
350 15 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 1.00
350 15 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 2.00
350 15 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 3.00
350 15 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 2.30
350 15 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 3.30
350 15 0.45 to 0.7 0.45 0.70
350 15 0.9 to 1.4 0.90 1.40
350 15 1.15 to 1.85 1.15 1.85
350 15 1.6 to 2.9 1.60 2.90
350 15 1.7 to 3.2 1.70 3.20
355
Type
3277
355 30 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
355 30 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
355 30 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
355 30 0.9 to 1.7 0.90 1.30 0.90 1.70
355 30 1.4 to 2.6 1.40 2.00 1.40 2.60
355 30 1.9 to 3.3 1.90 2.60 1.90 3.30
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
15 mm
Operating
travel
30 mm
Operating
travel
60 mm
Operating
travel
120 mm
Operating
travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
700
Type
3271
3277
700 30 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
700 30 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
700 30 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
700 30 1.4 to 2.3 1.40 1.85 1.40 2.30
700 30 2.1 to 3.3 2.10 2.70 2.10 3.30
700 30 2.35 to 3.8 2.35 3.05 2.35 3.80
700 30 2.6 to 4.3 2.60 3.45 2.60 4.30
700 30 0.35 to 0.45
700 30 0.7 to 0.9
700 30 1.0 to 1.35
700 30 1.3 to 1.8 1.30 1.80
700 30 1.7 to 2.6 1.70 2.15 1.70 2.60
700 30 1.9 to 3.3 1.90 2.60 1.90 3.30
700 30 2.0 to 3.6 2.00 2.80 2.00 3.60
1000
Type
3271
1000 60 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
1000 60 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.20 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
1000 60 0.8 to 2.8 0.80 1.30 0.80 1.80 0.80 2.80
1400-60
Type
3271
1400 60 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.40 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
1400 60 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
1400 60 0.5 to 2.5 0.50 1.00 0.50 1.50 0.50 2.50
1400 60 0.5 to 0.95 0.50 0.95
1400 60 0.7 to 1.4 0.70 1.05 0.70 1.40
1400 60 0.85 to 1.8 0.85 1.35 0.85 1.80
1400 60 1.1 to 2.4 1.10 1.75 1.10 2.40
1400 60 1.3 to 2.8 1.30 1.70 1.30 2.05 1.30 2.80
D
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
i
a
p
h
r
a
g
m

a
r
e
a

[

c
m
2

]
R
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

m
m

]
Bench
range
15 mm
Operating
travel
30 mm
Operating
travel
60 mm
Operating
travel
120 mm
Operating
travel
S
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

r
a
n
g
e

a
t

r
a
t
e
d

t
r
a
v
e
l

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
L
o
w
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
U
p
p
e
r

r
a
n
g
e

v
a
l
u
e

[

b
a
r

]
1400
-120
Type
3271
1400 120 0.4 to 1.2 0.40 0.60 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20
1400 120 0.8 to 2.4 0.80 1.00 0.80 1.20 0.80 1.60 0.80 2.40
1400 120 1.0 to 3.0 1.00 1.25 1.00 1.50 1.00 2.00 1.00 3.00
1400 120 1.2 to 3.6 1.20 1.50 1.20 1.80 1.20 2.40 1.20 3.60
2800
Type
3271
2800 120 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.40 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
2800 120 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
2800 120 0.5 to 2.5 0.50 1.00 0.50 1.50 0.50 2.50
2800 120 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.20 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
2800 120 0.8 to 1.7 0.80 1.25 0.80 1.70
2800 120 0.9 to 2.2 0.90 1.55 0.90 2.20
2800 120 1.0 to 2.7 1.00 1.85 1.00 2.70
2800 120 1.1 to 2.3 1.10 1.40 1.10 1.70 1.10 2.30
2800 120 1.2 to 2.8 1.20 1.60 1.20 2.00 1.20 2.80
2800 120 1.3 to 3.3 1.30 1.80 1.30 2.30 1.30 3.30
2x2800
Type
3271
5600 120 0.2 to 1.0 0.20 0.40 0.20 0.60 0.20 1.00
5600 120 0.4 to 2.0 0.40 0.80 0.40 1.20 0.40 2.00
5600 120 0.5 to 2.5 0.50 1.00 0.50 1.50 0.50 2.50
5600 120 0.6 to 3.0 0.60 1.20 0.60 1.80 0.60 3.00
5600 120 0.8 to 1.7 0.80 1.25 0.80 1.70
5600 120 0.9 to 2.2 0.90 1.55 0.90 2.20
5600 120 1.0 to 2.7 1.00 1.85 1.00 2.70
5600 120 1.1 to 2.3 1.10 1.40 1.10 1.70 1.10 2.30
5600 120 1.2 to 2.8 1.20 1.60 1.20 2.00 1.20 2.80
5600 120 1.3 to 3.3 1.30 1.80 1.30 2.30 1.30 3.30
9.2.23. Pneumatic piston actuator
The actuator consists basically of a cylinder, a piston with seal elements and the actuator
stem which is sealed at least on one side. This actuator type is hardly surpassed as far
as simplicity and robustness is concerned. Through extensive standardization a broad
range of actuator sizes are available. However, these actuators can only utilize their full
strength in cases where a sufficiently high air supply pressure is available. This allows
relatively small piston diameters and compact dimensions. Since generally special tubes
are employed, with a super-finish inside, it is quite simple to create piston actuators with
a very long travel. A spring-return action cannot so simply and elegantly be produced as
it can be for pneumatic diaphragm actuators, because the necessary space inside the
cylinder is not available. For this reason, the return spring is usually positioned outside of
the cylinder. A simple piston actuator is represented in Figure 9.2.24.-2.
9.2.24. Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275
The actuators are mainly used with Type 3241 Valves in pressure swing adsorption
plants.
Special features
Small overall height
Powerful thrust due to the supply pressure of
max. 6 bar
Low friction
Temperature range from 30 to 80 C
The actuators with 314 und 490 cm
2
areas are
fixed to a yoke which is designed to accomodate a
pneumatic or electropneumatic positioner.
This type of direct attachment has the following
advantages:
Tight and accurate linkage
Adjustments are not affected during transport
Travel pick-off protected against touching and
external influences
meeting the requirements of the German Accident
Prevention
Regulations (VBG 5)
Easy pneumatic connection between actuator
and positioner
Figure 9.2.24.-1: Piston actuator Type 3275
The actuator with 804 cm
2
areas does need a yoke. The valve accessories are mounted
onto the NAMUR interface.
A special piston actuator type is often used for valves with rotary motion of 90 degrees.
In this case a double piston translates, via a rack and pinion gear Table 9.2.27.9.-1, or via
a lever linkage Figure 9.3.-2 and Figure 9.3.3.-1 the linear movement of the actuator into
a rotation angle of max. 90.
Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275
Effective actuator area 314 or 490 cm
2
Effective actuator area 804 cm
2
Figure 9.2.24.-2: Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275
9.2.25. Principle of operation
The piston of the actuator is pressurized with the supply air over the two connections
(G or G ).
The double-acting piston actuator does not have a defined fail-safe action as it does not
have spring assemblies.
Technical data
Version Type 3275
Actuator area cm
2
314 490 804
Supply pressure max. 6 bar 6 bar 6 bar
Rated travel mm 15 30 15 30 15 30
Piston displacement cm
3
471 942 735 1470 1206 2412
Air connection G G G
Max. perm. leakage (t 0 C) 50 cm
3
/min 58 cm
3
/min 70 cm
3
/min
Perm. temperature range for
continuous operation
30 to 80 C
Table 9.2.25.-1: Technical data of Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275
6
bar
5
3
1
4

c
m
2
4
9
0

c
m
2
8
0
4

c
m
2
4
3
2
1
0
0 10 20
18.4 29.4
30 40 50 kN
47.3
Figure 9.2.25.-2: Diagram showing forces of Type 3275 Pneumatic Piston Actuator
9.2.26. Mounting Servovalve actuators on SAMSON Series 3240 and 3250 Valves
In cooperation with Servovalve, an interface has been created which allows piston
actuators with up to 200 kN (higher forces on request) to be
mounted onto SAMSON valves.
Depending on the valve size and the actuator force required,
there are three different connection patterns:
Connection pattern 1 corresponding to connection diameter
30 mm (comparable to SAMSON actuators up to 700 cm
2
).
60 mm (comparable to SAMSON actuators 1400-60 cm
2
)
100 mm (comparable to SAMSON actuators 1400-120
cm
2
and larger) TV-SK 9902 shows the various connection
patterns including the required ordering data.
9.2.26.1 PD Pneumatic linear actuator
PD actuator can operate all kind of on-off or modulating valve with linear shaft motion.
Servovalve actuator type PD consists of one or more pneumatic double acting cylinders
designed to operate linear valves as globe or gate valves.
In this catalogue standard actuators are shown for cylinder diameter sizes up to 800 mm.
For greater thrusts or larger cylinder sizes than shown, special execution can be realized
on request.
PD actuator is designed and manufactured so as to operate in the heaviest work condition
in every environment according to the international specification.
Typical features are the extremely simple and rugged construction, the special care in the
components material selection to reduce the corrosion phenomenon.
All actuators are enclosed in order to guarantee a water proof protection.
PD actuator can be equipped with mechanical or hydraulic manual emergency device.
A PTFE charged slide guarantees a perfect drive and alignment of the piston under all
load conditions allowing gasket seals long life.
Each execution can be supplied with equipment and device for local or remote control.
Chromium plated carbon steel shaft and PTFE charged bushings reduce the sliding
friction of the actuator moving components.
Standard cylinder up to size DN 200 is realized in special aluminium alloy and from DN
250 is realized in chromium plated carbon steel in order to prevent corrosion phenomenon
and make the piston linear movement easier.
PD actuator is supplied with a standard painted surface protection with one primer layer
and one alkydic resin layer. Other coatings are available on request.
The inner parts of PD actuator are lifetime lubricated, therefore only replacement of the
rubber gaskets may become necessary after a long working time.
All PD actuators undergo many tests before delivering to the customer for being assembled
to the valve. The modular elements system , with which the actuators are built, allows an
easy and sure assembly and a safe and easy maintenance.
SERVOVALVE is certified by DNV and actuators are designed, manufactured and tested
according to ISO EN 9001-2000 and, if requested, according to 97/23/CE directive (PED)
and 94/9/CE directive (ATEX).
9.2.26.2 Double Acting
Type PD 125 to PD 200 Type PD 250 to PD 800 Type PD 420/2 to PD 800/2
Figure 9.2.26.2.-1: Sectional drawing of Pneumatic Linear Actuator Type PD125 to PD 800
9.2.26.3 Double Acting with Handwheel
PDV 125 to PDV 200 PDV 205 to PDV 420
Figure 9.2.26.3.-1: Double Acting with Handwheel for Actuator PDV 125 to PDV 420
9.2.26.4 Double Acting with Manual Gear
PDR 360 to PDR 800 PDR 420/2 to PDR 800/2
Figure 9.2.26.4.-1: Double Acting with Handwheel for Actuator PDR 360 to PDR 800/2
9.2.26.5 Double Acting with Manual Hydraulic Pump
PDH 500 to PDH 800 PDH 420/2 to PDH 800/2
Figure 9.2.26.5.-1: Double Acting with Manual Hydraulic Pump for PDH 500 to PDH 800 and
PDH 420/2 to PDH 800/2
Double Acting Serie PD
Air working pressure 2 to 8 bar
Standard design pressure 10 bar
Air test pressure 15 working pressure
Standard temperature range -20 +80 C
Medium
Instrument air (dry not lubricated)
Special medium type on request
Different medium pressure on request
Execution on request
On-off or modulating execution
Equipped with adapter or bracket and hub for coupling
to the valve
Equipped with adjustable mechanical stop-screws
Under sea for marine service
Special environmental condition
High or low temperature
Suitable for water-proof or explosion-proof zone
Optional Equipment
Pneumatic and electric equipment (limit switches
solenoid valve positioner etc.)
Electro-pneumatic circuit for remote and local control of
valve
Air tank and equipment for fail safe action
For all further data, accessory, and industry codes
see the associated technical data sheet.
Table 9.2.26.5.-2: Technical data of pneumatic actuator Double Acting Serie PD
Actuators Thrust in kN
Actuator Type
Minimum operating air pressure
3 bar 4 bar 5 bar 6 bar
PD 125 3.3 4.4 5.5 6.6
PD 160 5.4 7.2 9 11
PD 200 8.5 11 14 17
PD 250 13 18 22 27
PD 300 19 25 32 38
PD 360 27 37 46 55
PD 420 38 51 64 77
PD 500 49 65 81 98
PD 520 58 78 97 117
PD 600 70 94 117 140
Actuators Thrust in kN
Actuator Type
Minimum operating air pressure
3 bar 4 bar 5 bar 6 bar
PD 620 83 110 140 170
PD 700 96 130 160 190
PD 800 130 170 210 250
PD 420/2 77 100 130 160
PD 500/2 98 130 165 200
PD 520/2 120 160 200 235
PD 600/2 140 190 230 280
PD 620/2 170 220 280 330
PD 700/2 190 250 320 380
PD 800/2 250 330 420 500
Table 9.2.26.5.-3: Actuators Thrust in kN of pneumatic actuator Double Acting Serie PD
Equipment description for typical pneumatic circuits (Figure 9.2.26.5.-5)
Pos. Equipment Pos. Equipment Pos. Equipment
1 Limit Switch 10 Non Return Valve 19
Manual lockable
Distributor 3/2
2 By-Pass 11 Air Lock Distributor 20
Emergency Solenoid
Valve 3/2
3
Hydraulic Manual
Distributor
12 Air Tank 21 Filter
4
Hydraulic Relief
Valve
13 Discharge Plug 22 Position Transmitter
5
Hydraulic Manual
Pump
14
Pneumatic Relief
Valve
23 Positioner
6
Pneumatic Solenoid
Valve 4/2
15 Pressure Switch 24 Booster
7 Air Set 16 Gauge Air 25
Pneumatic
Distributor 4/2
8
Unidirectional Flow
Regulator
17 Pressure Reductor 26
Manual Distributor
4/2
9
Pneumatic
Distributor 3/2
18 Flow Regulator
Table 9.2.26.5.-4: Equipment description for typical pneumatic circuits
Typical pneumatic circuits for Double Acting Actuators Series PD
PD PDV PDR PDH
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
4
3
5
1
PD/SA
8
6
8
7
Pneumatic
Connection
6
10
18
7
17
Pneumatic
Connection
PD/LK PD/AL
6
7
11
Pneumatic
Connection
6
14
16
12
10
7
13
Pneumatic
Connection
PD/AC
20
25
17
10
12
16
14
13
21
Pneumatic
Connection
25
18
19
20
17
14
12
10
21
16
13
Pneumatic
Connection
PD/FS
9
12
16
13
14
9
22
23
SIGNAL
20
10
21
15
SIGNAL
17
Pneumatic
Connection
9 9
14
12
13
16
26
10
20
Pneumatic
Connection
SIGNAL
23
24
24
21
17
Figure 9.2.26.5.-5: Typical pneumatic circuits for Double Acting Actuators Series PD
9.2.27. Rack and pinion pneumatic actuator
4th GENERATION
PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
Member of SAMSON Group

9.2.27.1 AIR TORQUE delivery program
Standard series 90 rotation
N 15 sizes double acting
Torque at 5.5 bar from 6.7 Nm to 4,955 Nm
Torque at 80 psi from 59.1 lb-in to 44,900 Lb-in
N 14 sizes spring return
Spring torque from 3.4 Nm to 2,207 Nm
Spring torque from 29.8 lb-in to 19,530 Lb-in
3-Position or dosing actuator with external
Adjustable intermediate position available in:
90 Rotation double acting
90 Rotation spring return
120 and 180 rotation double acting
Actuator with 100% external travel stop
Fast acting actuator
Lock-out capability in fully-open or fully-closed position
9.2.27.1 AIR TORQUE delivery program
Double acting and spring return actuator with hydraulic
speed control
Forged stainless steel double acting and spring return
actuator
Double acting actuator in 120, 135, 180 or other stroke available in 9 sizes
Double acting actuator in 120, 135, 180 or other stroke
available in 9 sizes
Spring return actuator in 180 stroke available in 9 size
180 spring return actuator with 90 fail safety position
Table 9.2.27.1.-1: AIR TORQUE delivery program
9.2.27.2 Design
The new 4th Generation rack and pinion pneumatic actuator has been designed,
developed and tested incorporating the latest technology and materials available, with
some innovative design features.
As a result of this product research we have obtained a high grade product with the
following characteristics:
Reliability
High performance
Wider product range permitting a more economical sizing selection
Innovative and patented universal drive shaft and multifunction position indicator
Full compliance with latest worldwide specifications
A wide selection of highest levels of corrosion protection technology
Aesthetically compact and modern style with no external cavities to avoid deposit build
up.
9.2.27.3 Construction
1
Extruded aluminum body with both internal and external corrosion protection
having a honed cylinder surface for longer life and a lower coefficient of friction.
2
Dual piston rack and pinion design for compact construction, symmetric
mounting position, high-cycle life and fast operation. Reverse rotation can be
accomplished in the field by simply inverting the pistons.
3
Two independent external travel stop adjustments permit easy and precise
adjustment of +/- 4 in both directions. This adjustment may be made in either the
open or closed position and provides for accurate valve alignment.
4
Universal and anti-blowout patented drive shaft for an easy conversion from
parallel to diagonal square and vice versa. This feature permits a lower and more
flexible stock. UNIVERSAL DOUBLE SQUARE design available as option on 4th
Generation and as standard on Power Technology permits easy adaptation to any
valve and allows for a lower and more flexible inventory.
5
A single compact design utilizing identical body and end caps for both double
acting and spring return models. This feature reduces inventory and allows field
conversion, by adding or removing modular spring cartridges.
6
Multifunctional position indicator for visual position indication and a direct, easy,
economical way to mount popular sensors.
7
Multiple bearings and guides on pistons and racks for precise operation, low
friction, high cycle life and a blowout proof pinion shaft.
8
Modular pre loaded spring cartridges designed with coated springs for simple
range versatility, greater safety and corrosion resistance.
9
Fully machined teeth on piston racks and pinion shaft for accurate positioning,
low backlash and maximum engagement resulting in overall efficient operation.
10
Electroless nickel-plated blowout resistant, bearing guided, one-piece pinion
shaft for improved safety and maximum cycle life.
11
Selected high quality bearings and seals that provide a wide operating
temperature range, low friction and high cycle life.
12
Internal and external stainless steel fasteners for long term corrosion resistance.
13
Full conformance to following latest specifications: ISO 5211, DIN 3337 and VDI/
VDE 3845 for product interchangeability and easy mounting of solenoids, limit
switches and other accessories.
6
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Figure 9.2.27.3.-1: Design and construction
9.2.27.4 Range of Options,
With the 4th generation actuator we are able to offer 6 different levels of protections
A, B, C, D, E, P. Please see table of protection levels available N P04/03.
Stainless steel 303 or 316 drive shafts are available on request for all sizes no matter
the type of corrosion protection selected.
For extremely high or low temperature applications all models may be equipped with
FPM or Silicone O rings along with an AIR TORQUE tested and certified suitable
lubricant.
100% Adjustable travel stop.
Economical lock out capability in fully-open or fully-closed position.
Multifunction position indicator with available Stainless Steel metal inserts providing
for proximity contact points.
Other than the standard double square bottom drive shaft connection, we can supply
a keyed drive connection, a flat head connection or a special personalized drive
connection.
120 and 180 Actuator rotation and intermediate rotations like 135.
3 Position and Dosing Actuators.
3 position 180 Spring return Actuators with 90 fail safety position.
Actuator with hydraulic speed control (Damper).
Fast Acting Actuators.
9.2.27.5 Quality Manufacturing
AIR TORQUE actuators are manufactured under a quality system independently
assessed and approved to ISO 9001-2000.
Every actuator is factory tested and provided with a unique serial number for
traceability.
Every actuator is properly marked in accordance with the latest applicable
international standard with all product data and a complete product identification.
Each actuator is individually supplied with Manual Instruction for use and
maintenance in 5 languages.
Each actuator is individually packed in a durable carton box having the full
description of the product for protection and easy identification.
9.2.27.6 Accessories available
Different square reductions suitable for drive.
Centering rings for all sizes.
Brackets
Couplings
Solenoid valves
Switch boxes
Proximity switches and sensors
Gear boxes
Positioners
9.2.27.7 Multi-function indicator
The multi-function indicator which is supplied as standard on 4th Generation Actuator and
manufactured in composite material is suitable for:
Multi-function indicator
Position indication
Visual indication of the Actuator/Valve
position is shown via a color coded insert
and Namur slot.
The indicator is suitable for all types of
drive shaft and either direction of actuator
rotation.
Actuator ancillary drive
The Namur drive slot in the position
indicator permits direct drive engagement
of switch boxes and positioners.
Device in
combination with
common used
external solenoids.
Device with
integrated solenoid.
Direct mounting of sensors
The indicator can be supplied with metal
inserts to permit easy and economical
installation of many types of sensors: P+F,
IFM, TURK, etc.
Multi-function indicator
Ancillary installation without multi-function indicator
S.S. Cover insert
with VDI/VDE slot
The 4th Generation actuator can be
supplied upon request with a Stainlees
Steel (S.S.) Cover that replaces the
standard indicator and has the Namur
drive slot permitting:
Fitment of ancillary such as switch
boxes and positioners
Indication of actuator position via the
Namur slot
Operate at high temperature
Manual operation of the actuator in
cases of emergency.
100% Travel stop adjustment on 4th generation actuator
Longer screws for 100% stroke adjustment
The 4th Generation standard actuator
provides stroke adjustment of + or - 4 in
both directions 0 and 90.
When a stroke of less than 90 is required
e.g. 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 80, etc. the
actuator can be supplied with special
bolts in both End-Caps to allow stroke
adjustment or limitation, from 0 to 90
according to customer requirements. The
100% TRAVEL STOP ADJUSTMENT
is available on all of the 4th Generation
actuator range.
Lock-out capability in fully-open or fully-closed position
Special longer bolt, to use only to lock the
actuator in one position when you need.
The 4th generation actuator offers an
economical solution when is requested to
locking the actuator in the fully-open (90)
or fully-closed (0) position. The actuator
can be supplied with a special bolt and
locking device to permanently lock the
actuator in position by using a padlock
and preventing unwanted operation.
Figure 9.2.27.7.-1: Multi-function indicator
9.2.27.8 Operating conditions
Operating media:
Dry or lubricated air or inert/non-corrosive gases on condition that they are
compatible with internal actuator parts and lubricant.
The operating media must have a dew point equal to -20 C (-40 F) or at least 10
C below the ambient temperature.
The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 .
Supply pressure:
For Double Acting and Spring Return actuators the maximum supply pressure is
8 bar (116 psi). Minimum supply pressure is 2.5 bar (36 psi).
Operating Temperature:
Standard product from -20C (-4F) to +80C (+176F)
Low temperature LT actuator with silicon O rings from -40C (-40F) to +80C
(+176 F)
High temperature HT actuator with FPM O rings from -15C (+5F) to +150C
(+300F)
Caution: For low and high temperature service, special grease is required. Please
contact AIR TORQUE for each application. High and low temperature will vary the
output torque of the actuator.
Stroke:
The stroke for AIR TORQUE actuators is as follows (See technical data):
Standard construction: 90 rotation with stroke adjustment at 0 and 90 + or - 4
Type Y 120 stroke: 120 rotation with stroke adjustment at 0 and 120 + or - 4
Type X 180 stroke: 180 rotation with stroke adjustment at 0 and 180 + or - 4.
Operating Time:
See Technical Data Sheet
Lubrication:
Actuators are factory lubricated for the life under normal operating conditions.
The standard lubricant is suitable for use from -20 C (-40 F) to +80 C (+176 F).
For low (LT) and high (HT) temperature service, where special grease is required
please contact AIR TORQUE.
Construction:
Twin piston rack and pinion actuator design suitable for both indoor and outdoor
installation.
Actuator designation and Marking:
The actuator type, size, operating pressure, output torque, direction of rotation,
orientation of failure mode, operating temperature and drive type are determined by
actuator designation. AIR TORQUE actuators are supplied with a label showing all
this informations: type, model (including protection and if applicable the LT or HT for
operating temperature), stroke, maximum permissible supply pressure, direction of
rotation, output torque, ancillary mounting detail, pressure connection, actuator/valve
mounting detail and serial number.
9.2.27.9 Operating function and direction of rotation
The standard rotation is clockwise to close, counter-clockwise rotation is achieved when
port 2 is pressurised.
For actuator marked LF the rotation is counter-clockwise to close, clockwise rotation is
obtained when port 2 is pressurised
Double Acting
operation function
(standard rotation)
Air supplied to Port 2
forces the pistons apart
and towards the actuators
end caps, with the exhaust
air exiting at Port 4, a
counter-clockwise rotation is
achieved.
"4" "2
Air supplied to Port 4 forces
the pistons together with
exhaust air exiting at Port
2, a clockwise rotation is
achieved.
"4" "2"
Single Acting
operation function
(standard rotation)
Air supplied to Port 2
forces the pistons apart
and toward the actuator
end caps, compressing the
springs with the exhaust
air existing at Port 4, a
counter clockwise rotation is
achieved.
"4" "2"
On loss of air pressure (air
or electric failure) at Port 2
allows the springs to force
the pistons together with the
exhaust air exiting at Port
2, a clockwise rotation is
achieved. "4" "2"
Table 9.2.27.9.-1: Operating function and direction of rotation
9.2.27.10 Torque diagram Double Acting actuators
In double acting actuators (Figure 9.2.27.10.-1) the output torque is the result of the
pistons force (given by the air supply pressure) multiplied by the pitch shaft radius (lever
arm) less the force lost for friction (efficiency): for this reason the output torque is linear
(Figure 9.2.27.10.-1).
"4" "2"
Air
pressure
Torque
LA = efective lever arm
LA
Torque Nm
90
Actuator Torque
Rotation
0
Figure 9.2.27.10.-1: The Principle of double acting actuator
For double acting actuators in normal working conditions the suggested safety factor is
15-20%. Air Torque actuators are designed for precise and accurate operation, maximum
machined teeth engagement, low backlash and multiple bearings on pistons to ensure
the highest level of efficiency and high cycle life.
9.2.27.11 Spring Return Actuator
When port 2 is pressurized and exhaust air exits from port 4, both pistons move towards
the end-caps and compress the springs (Table 9.2.27.9.-1) making the drive shaft turn.
For standard assembly a counter-clockwise rotation ccw is obtained (clockwise rotation
is possible by changing the pistons assembly). When air or electricity fails, a fail-safe
position is guaranteed by the springs force. For standard assembly a clockwise rotation
cw is obtained (counter-clockwise rotation is possible by changing the pistons assembly).
In spring return actuators the output torque is the result of two operations, whose values
depend on the stroke position (0 or 90). In spring return actuators the output torque is
the result of the force (air or springs acting on the pistons) multiplied by the lever arm.
Figure 9.2.27.11.-1: Type 3967 Solenoid Valve, attachment with NAMUR interface to rotary
First operation (Figure 9.2.27.11.-2)
The output torque is generated by air supply pressure at Port 2 after compressing the
springs, called OUTPUT TORQUE AIR STROKE. In this case air forces the pistons from
the 0 to the 90 position and consequently the torque starts from a high value and during
the stroke it constantly decreases until 90 (Figure 9.2.27.11.-2) due to the natural force
that springs generate (oppose) when they are compressed.
Torque Nm
0 90 Rotation
A
i
r

s
t
r
o
k
e

O
u
t
p
u
t

T
o
r
q
u
e

"4" "2"
LA
LA = efective lever arm
Torque
Figure 9.2.27.11.-2: The Principle of single acting actuator with compressed air
Second operation (Figure 9.2.27.11.-3)
The output torque is generated by the force that springs release onto the pistons when
air fails, called Output Torque Spring Stroke. In this case the torque, starting from
the 90 position, constantly decreases until 0 because of the springs extending (Figure
9.2.27.11.-2).
Torque Nm
0 90 Rotation
S
p
r
i
n
g

s
t
r
o
k
e

O
u
t
p
u
t

t
o
r
q
u
e
"4" "2"
LA
LA = Lever arm
Spring force
Figure 9.2.27.11.-3: The Principle of single acting actuator with spring
Air Torque spring return actuators are designed to produce a balanced torque in the
two conditions explained above when the number of springs per side is equal to the air
pressure supply (4 bar - 4 springs each side) as shown in Figure 9.2.27.11.-4.
For certain applications it is possible to achieve (where desired), the unbalanced torque as
shown in Figure 9.2.27.11.-5, by altering the relationship between the number of springs
per side and air pressure supply in bar (for example 6 springs and 5.5 bar or vice versa).
In spring return applications two conditions can be achieved: air failure to close or air
failure to open.
The suggested safety factor for spring return actuators in normal working conditions is
20-25%.
Ball Valve Torque
Safety Factor
A
ir

S
t
r
o
k
e
T
o
r
q
u
e S
p
r
in
g

S
t
r
o
k
e
T
o
r
q
u
e
Torque
Nm
Rotation 0 90
Figure 9.2.27.11.-4: Ball valve torque
Butterfly Valve Torque
Safety Factor
A
ir

S
t
r
o
k
e
T
o
r
q
u
e
S
p
rin
g
S
tro
k
e
T
o
rq
u
e
Torque
Nm
Rotation 0 90
Figure 9.2.27.11.-5: Butterfly valve torque
9.2.27.12 Air Torque Actuator Sizing
Sizing example of Double Acting AT actuator (see also technical data):
Published Butterfly Valve torque = 40 Nm
Safety factor (20%) = 40 Nm + 20% = 48 Nm
Air supply pressure available = 5 bar
Butterfly Valve Torque
Torque
Nm
Rotation 0 90
Actuator Torque
Safety Factor
Figure 9.2.27.12.-1: AT-Diagram for Butterfly Valve
The double acting AT actuator that produces a minimum of 48 Nm at 5 bar is AT200
(see also the Figure 9.2.27.12.-1).
Spring to close when air fails (Balanced Torque) see also the Figure 9.2.27.11.-4.
Published Ball Valve torque = 80 Nm
Safety factor (20%) = 80 Nm + 20% = 96 Nm
Air supply pressure available = 5 bar
The spring return AT actuator selected is AT400 S10, because it produces the
following values:
Spring stroke 0 = 105 Nm
Spring stroke 90 = 165 Nm
Air stroke 0 = 172 Nm
Air stroke 90 = 112 Nm
Spring to close when air fails see also the Figure 9.2.27.11.-5.
(Unbalanced Torque)
Published Butterfly Valve torque = 45 Nm
Safety factor (20%) = 47 Nm + 20% = 56.4 Nm
Air supply pressure available = 5.5 bar
The spring return AT actuator selected is AT 300 S12, because it produces the following
values:
Spring stroke 0 = 60.8 Nm
Spring stroke 90 = 94.5 Nm
Air stroke 0 = 85.4 Nm
Air stroke 90 = 51.7 Nm
9.2.27.13 Sizing information
The aim of this information is to assist in the correct selection of AIR TORQUE
actuators. Before fitting an AIR TORQUE actuator onto any valve the following data
must be considered.
Breakaway torque of the valve + safety factor as recommended by the manufacturer/
considering the operating conditions.
Air supply pressure available to the actuator
Type of actuator D (double acting) or S (spring return) and output torque of
actuator at the available air supply pressure
Actuator rotation and the fail mode (to fail open or to fail close)
The correct selection of an actuator is critical, if the actuator is oversized the valve stem
can be overstressed, on the contrary if the actuator is undersized it cannot produce
enough torque to permit full valve operation.
Generally we can say that the torque required for valve operation comes from the friction
between the metallic parts of the valve (for example ball or disc) and the seals (seats).
Moreover the torque is influenced by various factors depending on the type of application
of the valve (service condition), service temperature, operation frequency, line and
differential pressure, flow media (lubricated, dry or slurry).
The following examples show the torque characteristic for 3 types of quarter-turn valves,
Ball Valve, Butterfly Valve and Plug Valve.
Ball Valve
100 %
25-30 %
70-80 %
OPEN CLOSE
BALL VALVE TORQUE
Torque %
Valve Rotation
Ball valve concept of construction is based
essentially on a polished ball (including a
through port) contained between two seats
(upstream and downstream). The ball rotation
allows the flow or stops the flow through the
valve. Differential of pressure between
upstream and downstream pressure forces the
ball against the downstream seat (floating ball
design). In this case the valve torque is
generated by the friction between the ball,
seat,stem and packing.
As shown in the diagram below the highest point of torque occurs when with the
presence of pressure, and the ball in the closed position, the valve is moved to the
open position (breakaway torque).
Butterfly Valve
OPEN
15-20 %
100 %
CLOSE
BUTTERFLY VALVE TORQUE
Torque %
Valve Rotation
Butterfly valve concept of construction is
based essentially on a disc fixed on an axis. In
the closed position the disc is completely
contained by the seat. The open position is
achieved when the disc is rotated (through its
stem) becomes parallel to the flow.
On the contrary, the closed position is
achieved when the disc is perpendicular to
the flow. With a butterfly valve the torque is
generated by the friction between the disc,
seat and the stem packing. Also torque may
be effected by the differential pressure that forces on the disc. The highest point of
torque, as shown in the diagram below, is in the closed position, and after only a small
rotation torque is considerably reduced.
Plug Valve
OPEN
80-90 %
100 %
CLOSE
PLUG VALVE TORQUE
Torque %
Valve Rotation
Plug valve concept construction is based
essentially on a male (plug) contained in a
female cone (seat). The plug provides a
through port in one direction and with its
rotation into the seat the opening and closure
of the valve is achieved.
The torque is usually not influenced by the
flow pressure, but is generated essentially
by the friction between the seat and the plug,
during the opening + closing cycle.
The highest point of torque as shown in the
diagram below, occurs in the closed position and remains high for the rest of the
operation, because the torque is not influenced by pressure.
Table 9.2.27.13.-1: Sizing information
9.2.27.14 4th Generation pneumatic actuator
Figure 9.2.27.14.-1: 4th Generation pneumatic actuators: Model AT 051, AT 101, AT 201, AT 251, AT 301,
AT 351, AT 401, AT 451, AT 501, AT 551, AT 601, AT 651, AT 701, and AT 801
Figure 9.2.27.14.-2: Assembly examples of the AIR-TORQUE Actuator
9.2.27.15 Pneumatic actuator Model AT 051
(A extract from the technical data sheet N
o
AT 051DM)
Type Output torque for double acting in Nm
Pressure
2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 4.2 bar 4.5 bar 5.0 bar 5.5 bar 6.0 bar
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 8.3 10.0 11.6 13.3 14.0 15.0 16.6 18.3 19.9
Type Output torque for spring return in Nm
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 4.9 3.4 6.6 5.1 8.3 6.8 9.9 8.4 10.6 9.1 11.6 10.1 13.2 11.7
S 06 4.3 2.5 5.9 4.1 7.6 5.8 9.3 7.4 9.9 8.1 10.9 9.1 12.6 10.8 14.2 12.4
S 07 5.3 3.1 6.9 4.8 8.6 6.5 9.2 7.1 10.2 8.1 11.9 9.8 13.6 11.5 15.2 13.1
S 08 6.2 3.8 7.9 5.5 8.6 6.2 9.6 7.2 11.2 8.8 12.9 10.5 14.6 12.1
S 09 7.2 4.5 7.9 5.2 8.9 6.2 10.6 7.8 12.2 9.5 13.9 11.2
S 10 8.2 5.2 9.9 6.9 11.5 8.5 13.2 10.2
S 11 9.2 5.9 10.9 7.6 12.5 9.2
S 12 10.2 6.6 11.9 8.2
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
Air Volume (liter) Operating Temperature C
2)
mm Opening Closing Opening Closing
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
50
D 0.20 D 0.25
0.09 0.15
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 0.25 S 0.30 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min.,
Inside pipe diameter 8 mm,
Medium clean air,
Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi),
Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the
moving time will be different.
2)
For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested.
Please contact Air Torque factory.
Operating Medium:
The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30
m (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when
actuator work below 0C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20C or, at least 10C
below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3).
Recommended size
Table 9.2.27.15.-1: Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 051
o
AT 101DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 14.7 17.6 20.5 23.5 24.6 26.4 29.3 32 35.2
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 9.1 6.2 12.0 9.2 15.0 12.1 17.9 15 19.1 16.2 20.8 17.9 23.8 20.9
S 06 8.0 4.5 10.9 7.5 13.9 10.4 16.8 13.3 18.0 14.5 19.7 16.3 22.7 19.2 25.6 22.1
S 07 9.8 5.8 12.8 8.7 15.7 11.6 16.9 12.8 18.6 14.6 21.5 17.5 24.5 20.4 27.4 23.4
S 08 11.6 7 14.6 10.0 15.7 11.1 17.5 12.9 20.4 15.8 23.4 18.7 26.3 21.7
S 09 13.5 8.3 15.0 9.4 16.4 11.2 19.3 14.1 22.3 17.1 25.2 20.0
S 10 15.3 9.5 18.2 12.4 21.1 15.4 24.1 18.3
S 11 17.1 10.8 20.0 13.7 23 16.6
S 12 18.9 12 21.9 14.9
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
63
D 0.25 D 0.30
0.16 0.26
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 0.30 S 0.35 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 201DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 29.1 34.9 40.7 46.5 48.9 52.4 58.2 64 69.8
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 18.0 11.8 23.8 17.6 29.7 23.4 35.5 29.2 37.8 31.6 41.3 35.0 47.1 40.9
S 06 15.8 8.3 21.6 14.1 27.5 19.9 33.3 25.8 35.6 28.1 39.1 31.6 44.9 37.4 50.7 43.2
S 07 19.4 10.7 25.2 16.5 31.1 22.3 33.4 24.6 36.9 28.1 42.7 33.9 48.5 39.8 54.3 45.6
S 08 23.0 13.0 28.8 18.8 31.2 21.2 34.7 24.7 40.5 30.5 46.3 36.3 52.1 42.1
S 09 26.6 15.4 29.0 17.7 32.5 21.2 38.3 27.0 44.1 32.8 49.9 38.6
S 10 30.2 17.7 36.1 23.6 41.9 29.4 47.7 35.2
S 11 33.8 20.1 39.7 25.9 45.5 31.7
S 12 37.5 22.4 43.3 28.3
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
75
D 0.30 D 0.35
0.31 0.49
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 0.40 S 0.50 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 251DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 45.8 54.9 64.1 73.2 76.9 82.4 91.5 101.0 110.0
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 27.4 16.9 36.6 26.0 45.7 35.2 54.9 44.3 58.5 48.0 64.0 53.5 73.2 62.6
S 06 23.8 11.1 32.9 20.3 42.1 29.4 51.2 38.6 54.9 42.2 60.4 47.7 69.5 56.9 78.7 66.0
S 07 29.2 14.5 38.4 23.6 47.5 32.8 51.2 36.4 56.7 41.9 65.8 51.1 75.0 60.2 84.2 69.4
S 08 34.7 17.9 43.9 27.0 47.5 30.7 53.0 36.2 62.2 45.3 71.3 54.5 80.5 63.6
S 09 40.2 21.2 43.9 24.9 49.4 30.4 58.5 39.5 67.7 48.7 76.8 57.8
S 10 45.7 24.6 54.8 33.8 64.0 42.9 73.1 52.1
S 11 51.2 28 60.3 37.1 69.5 46.3
S 12 56.7 31.4 65.8 40.5
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
88
D 0.40 D 0.50
0.51 0.78
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 0.50 S 0.60 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 301DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 66.5 79.8 93.1 106 112 120 133 146 160
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 41.1 27.1 54.4 40.4 67.7 53.7 81.0 67.0 86.3 72.3 94.3 80.3 108 93.6
S 06 36.1 19.2 49.4 32.5 62.7 45.8 76.0 59.1 81.3 64.4 89.3 72.4 103 85.7 116 99.0
S 07 44.3 24.6 57.6 37.9 70.9 51.2 76.2 56.5 84.2 64.5 97.5 77.8 111 91.1 124 104
S 08 52.5 30.0 65.8 43.3 71.1 48.7 79.1 56.6 92.4 69.9 106 83.2 119 96.5
S 09 60.8 35.5 66.0 40.8 74.0 48.8 87.3 62.1 101 75.3 114 88.6
S 10 69.0 40.9 82.3 54.2 95.6 67.5 109 80.8
S 11 77.2 46.3 90.5 59.6 104 72.9
S 12 85.4 51.7 98.7 65.0
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
100
D 0.50 D 0.60
0.71 1.11
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 0.70 S 0.90 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 351DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 107 129 150 172 181 193 215 236 258
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 66.5 41.9 87.9 63.4 109 84.9 131 106 140 115 152 128 174 149
S 06 58.3 28.8 79.7 50.3 101 71.8 123 93.3 131 102 144 115 166 136 187 158
S 07 71.5 37.2 93.0 58.7 115 80.2 123 88.8 136 102 158 123 179 145 200 166
S 08 84.8 45.6 106 67.1 115 75.7 128 88.6 149 110 171 132 192 153
S 09 98.1 54.0 107 62.6 120 75.5 141 97.0 163 118 184 140
S 10 111 62.4 133 83.9 154 105 176 127
S 11 125 70.8 146 92.3 168 114
S 12 138 79.2 159 101
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
115
D 0.70 D 0.80
1.19 1.80
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 0.90 S 1.10 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 401DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 138 166 194 222 233 249 277 305 332
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 86 56.1 114 83.8 141 111 169 139 180 150 197 167 224 195
S 06 75.5 39.6 103 67.3 131 95 159 123 170 134 186 150 214 178 242 206
S 07 92.7 50.8 120 78.5 148 106 159 117 176 134 203 162 231 189 259 217
S 08 110 62 138 89.7 149 101 165 117 193 145 221 173 248 201
S 09 127 73.3 138 84.3 155 101 182 129 210 156 238 184
S 10 144 84.5 172 112 200 140 227 168
S 11 161 95.7 189 123 217 151
S 12 179 107 206 135
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
125
D 0.90 D 1.10
1.54 2.34
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 1.20 S 1.40 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 451DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 217 261 304 348 365 391 435 478 522
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 135 88.6 179 132 222 176 265 219 283 236 309 262 352 306
S 06 119 62,8 162 106 206 150 249 193 266 211 293 237 336 280 379 324
S 07 146 80,5 189 124 233 167 250 185 276 211 320 254 363 298 406 341
S 08 173 98.2 216 142 233 159 260 185 303 229 347 272 390 316
S 09 200 116 217 133 243 159 287 203 330 246 374 290
S 10 227 134 270 177 314 221 357 264
S 11 254 151 297 195 341 238
S 12 281 169 324 213
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
145
D 1.20 D 1.40
2.41 3.78
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 1.50 S 1.80 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 501DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 284 340 397 454 477 511 567 624 681
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 171 118 228 174 285 231 342 288 364 310 398 344 455 401
S 06 149 84,3 206 141 262 198 319 255 342 277 376 311 433 368 489 425
S 07 183 108 240 165 297 221 319 244 353 278 410 335 467 391 524 448
S 08 218 131 274 188 297 211 331 245 388 302 444 358 501 415
S 09 252 155 275 178 309 212 365 268 422 325 479 382
S 10 286 178 343 235 400 292 456 349
S 11 320 202 377 259 434 315
S 12 355 225 411 282
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
160
D 1.50 D 1.7
3.14 4.92
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 1.80 S 2.1 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 551DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 383 459 536 613 643 689 766 842 919
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 225 146 301 223 378 299 455 376 485 406 531 452 608 529
S 06 193 99 270 175 346 252 423 329 454 359 500 405 576 482 653 558
S 07 238 128 315 205 391 281 422 312 468 358 544 434 621 511 698 587
S 08 283 157 360 234 390 264 436 310 513 387 589 464 666 540
S 09 328 186 359 217 405 263 481 340 558 416 634 493
S 10 373 216 450 292 526 369 603 445
S 11 418 245 495 321 571 398
S 12 463 274 540 351
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
180
D 2.00 D 2.20
4.26 6.89
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 2.40 S 2.80 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 601DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 532 638 745 851 893 957 1064 1170 1276
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 319 217 426 323 532 430 638 536 681 578 745 642 851 749
S 06 277 154 383 260 489 367 596 473 638 515 702 579 808 686 915 792
S 07 341 197 447 304 553 410 596 453 660 516 766 623 872 729 979 835
S 08 404 241 511 347 553 390 617 453 723 560 830 666 936 772
S 09 468 284 511 327 575 390 681 497 787 603 894 709
S 10 532 327 638 434 745 540 851 646
S 11 596 371 702 477 809 583
S 12 660 414 766 520
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
200
D 2.70 D 3.20
5.94 9.46
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 3.50 S 4.00 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 651DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 893 1072 1251 1430 1501 1608 1787 1966 2144
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 533 372 712 551 890 730 1069 908 1141 980 1248108714261266
S 06 461 268 640 447 818 625 997 804 1068 876 1176 983 1354 1162 15331340
S 07 568 343 746 521 925 700 996 771 1104 879 12821057146112361640 1415
S 08 674 417 853 596 924 667 1032 774 1210 953 1389 1132 15681310
S 09 781 491 852 563 959 670 1138 849 1317102814951206
S 10 887 566 1066 745 1245 923 1423 1102
S 11 994 640 1173 819 1351 998
S 12 1101 715 1279 894
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
240
D 3.5 D 4.0
10 15.2
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 4.1 S 4.6 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 701DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 1297 1556 1815 2075 2179 2334 2594 2853 3112
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 751 496 1011 755 1270101515291274163313781789153320481793
S 06 642 336 902 595 1161 854 1420 1114 15241217168013731939163221981892
S 07 792 435 1052 694 1311 954 1415105715701213183014722089173223491991
S 08 943 534 1202 793 1306 897 14611053172113121980157122391831
S 09 1093 633 1197 737 1352 893 1612 1152 1871 1411 21301671
S 10 1243 732 1503 992 1762 12512021 1510
S 11 1393 832 1653109119121350
S 12 1544 931 18031190
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
265
D 4.0 D 4.0
14.5 21.38
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 4.5 S 4.5 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
o
AT 801DM)
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
D 2252 2703 3153 3604 3784 4054 4504 4955 5405
Pressure
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90
S 05 13321014178314652233191526842365286425463134281635853266
S 06 1149 767 15991217204916672500 2118 26802298295025683401301938513469
S 07 1415 969 186514202316187024962050276623213217277136673222 4118 3672
S 08 1682 1172 213216232312180325822073303325243483297439343424
S 09 194813752128155523981825284922763299272637503177
S 10 2215157826652028 3115 247935662929
S 11 248117812931223133822682
S 12 2748198331982434
S = Springs
Max.
Pressure
Rotation
Chamber Moving Time
1)
2)
STD
(standard)
HT
(high
temperature)
LT
(low
temperature)
8.0 bar
90 4
330
D 6.0 D 7.0
25 40
NBR
O-Ring
FPM
O-Ring
Silicone
O-Ring
At 0 and
90
S 7.5 S 8.5 -20 to +80 -15 to +150 -40 to +80
Notes:
1)
Room Temperature,
Actuator Stroke 90,
Medium clean air,

2)
Operating Medium:
Recommended size
9.2.27.29 Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator
Components A B C
Body
Alodur (Special hard
anodized)
Color:
Bright Stainless
steel
Alodur + PTFE
coating
Color:
Light grey
ENP+ Polyester
transparent coated
Color:
Bright Stainless
steel
End-caps
Chromatized +
Polyester Coated
Color:
S.S. Ral 9007 or
Blue Ral 5015
Chromatized +
Polyester Coated
Color:
S.S. Ral 9007 or
Blue Ral 5015
Chromatized +
Polyester Coated
Color:
S.S. Ral 9007
Drive shaft Carbon Steel ENP
1)
Carbon Steel ENP
1)
Carbon Steel ENP
1)
Pistons
Normal Anodized
Color: Black
Normal Anodized
Color: Black
Normal Anodized
Color: Black
Suitable for: General service
General service
Acids or basic
solutions in low
concentration
General service
Caustic soda in low
concentration
Not recommended
for:
Caustic Soda
All strong acids or
basic solutions
Nitric acid
N-Methyle
Pirolidone
(solvent)
Nitric acid
Chlorine, sulfuric
and salted
environment
Salt Spray Test
Certif. N
SAC/655/98 SAC/656/98 SAC/892/96
Kesternick Test
Certif. N
SAC/299/98 SAC/300/98 SAC/895/96
Actuator pictures
sheet.
Table 9.2.27.29.-1: Protection Levels Available for Type A, B, and C
1)
ENP = Electroless nickel coating High Phosphorous content P>10%
9.2.27.30 Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator
Components D E P
Body
Alodur + PTFE
coating
Color:
Light grey
Alodur + PTFE
coating
Color:
Light grey
Alodur (special hard
anodized)
Color:
Bright Stainless
steel
End-caps
Chromatized +
PTFE coating
Color:
Light grey
Chromatized +
PTFE coating
Color:
Light grey
Resin Impregnated
+ Hard Anodized
Color:
Dark gray
Drive shaft Carbon Steel ENP
1)
Stainless Steel 303
(Option 316)
Carbon Steel ENP
1)
Pistons
Normal Anodized
Color: Black
Normal Anodized
Color: Black
Normal Anodized
Color: Black
Suitable for:
General service
Acids or basic
solutions in low
concentration
General service
Acids or basic
solutions in low
concentration
General service
Suggested for
any kind of solve
Not recommended
for:
Nitric acid
N-Methyle
Pirolidone
(solvent)
Nitric acid
N-Methyle
Pirolidone
(solvent)
Caustic soda
All strong acids or
basic solutions
Salt Spray Test
Certif. N
SAC/890/96 SAC/886/96 SAC/304/98
Kesternick Test
Certif. N
SAC/896/96 SAC/897/96 SAC/301/98
Actuator pictures
sheet.
Table 9.2.27.30.-1: Protection Levels Available for Type D, E, and P
1)
ENP = Electroless nickel coating High Phosphorous content P>10%
9.2.27.31 Full compliance with worldwide specifications
AIR TORQUE 4th Generation actuator are designed in full compliance with the latest
worldwide specifications relating to the actuator accessory and valve mounting interfaces.
Bottom mounting pad (Actuator to valve interface) configured in accordance with ISO
5211 and DIN 3337 specifications
Full compliance with worldwide specifcations
ISO 5211 and DIN 3337
configuration permits easy
installation of the actuator
directly onto a valve or will
interface through an ISO
bracket. ISO gear boxes.
AIR TORQUE can supply
all mounting kits i.e.
Assorted Square drive
reducer pieces suitable
for all square drive shaft,
Centering rings for all sizes,
Brackets and Couplings.
Other than the standard
bottom ISO/DIN Parallel
or Diagonal square
output on the drive shaft
connection, we can supply
a Keyed connection,
Flat head connection or
special customized drive
connections.
Top mounting pad configuration is in accordance with VDI/VDE 3845 Namur
specification in order to permit simple and easy installation of the ancillary like switch
boxes and positioners. AIR TORQUE can supply many different types of switch boxes
and positioners for any application.
Full compliance with worldwide specifcations
Air supply connection is in accordance with VDI/VDE 3845 Namur specification to
provide simple and easy solenoid valve installation, direct mount avoiding piping and
fittings. AIR TORQUE can also supply Namur solenoid valves: 5/2 and 3/2 way in all
standard voltages, D.C. or A.C.
5 3
2 4
1
2
1
3
5/2 SOLENOID
VALVE OPERATION
3/2 SOLENOID
VALVE OPERATION
5 3
2 4
1
2
1
3
5/2 SOLENOID
VALVE OPERATION
3/2 SOLENOID
VALVE OPERATION
Adapter for magnetoresistive AMR sensor for Electronic Limit switch Type 3738 with
enhanced diagnostics.
9.2.27.32 Company Approvals
ISO 9001-2000
GOST RUSSIA (AVAILABLE ON REQUEST)
Products Approvals/Compliance/Certifcates
Gost standard Russia (available on request)
DET NORSKE VERITAS TYPE APPROVAL
94/9/EC ATEX
IP 67 enclosure protection - EN 60529 -
Salt spray fog corrosion test - ISO 9227 (available on request)
Kesternich corrosion test ISO 3231 (available on request)
Patents
Air torque actuators are covered by many international patents .
Rack and pinion actuators
Advantages:
Very simple and robust.
Suitable up to the highest air supply pressures.
Compact physical size in spite of long travels (angle of rotation).
Economical for small actuator thrusts (torques).
Proven reliability at high and low temperatures.
Disadvantages:
Generally inadequate thrust (torque) at spring-return action.
Inevitable leakage after long working hours.
Higher friction and hysteresis compared to diaphragm actuators.
Expensive for high thrusts (torques) and normal pressures.
9.2.28. Rotary Actuator Type 3278
Single-acting pneumatic rotary diaphragm actuator for butterfy valves and other fnal
control elements with rotary closure members. Suitable for throttling and on/off service,
Maximum opening angle = 90.
Powerful torque and high speed of
response
Operating direction (spring opens/
spring closes) can be customized
Various bench ranges
Extremly adjustable stop screws to
limit the opening angle
Maximum angle of rotation (opening
angle) = 90
Designed for supply pressures up to
6 bar / 90 psi
Service temperatures from -35 to +
90 C /
Connections according to DIN ISO
5211
Actuator shaft available in three
diffrent diameters depending on the
actuator size
Optional attachment of positioners,
(limit switches, solenoid valve and
accessories)
User-selectable actuator action
Effective diaphragm area 160 and
320 cm
2
With Handwheel or without Handwheel
1 Cover plate
2 Diaphragm
3 Housing
4 Springs
5 Actuator stem
6 Lever stem
7 Actuator shaft
8 Stop screws
9 Handwheel
Figure 9.2.28.-1: Pneumatic Rotary Actuator Type 3278
Bench range
bar
Opening angle
Unable spring torques M in Nm at
diaphragm area cm
2
160 cm
2
320 cm
2
0.4 to 0.8
1)
0 10 32
15/20 15 49
90 21 67
M
max
24 85
0.5 to 1.0
0 12 40
15/20 19 61
90 23 85
M
max
28 115
0.8 to 1.6
0 20 64
15/20 30 97
90 42 132
M
max
50 175
0.9 to 1.8
1)
0 22 72
15/20 34 109
90 47 153
M
max
55 200
1.2 to 2.4
0 30 96
15/20 45 145
90 63 200
M
max
77 265
1.3 to 2.6
1)
0 32 104
15/20 48 157
90 67 218
M
max
82 285
1.7 to 3.4
0 42 136
15/20 63 206
90 89 286
M
max
107 375
For all further data, accessories, and industry codes
1)
Special range
Table 9.2.28.-2: Usable spring torques - all pressures in bar (gauge)
9.2.29. Pneumatic actuators of company Pfeiffer-Armaturen GmbH
Quarter-Turn Actuator Series BR31a
(AT=Air Torque)
Multi - Turn Actuator
Type BR 30a
9.2.29.1 Multi - Turn Actuator - Pfeiffer Type BR 30a
Application
Single-acting pneumatic rotary diaphragm actuator for butterfly valves and other final
control elements with rotary closure members.
Maximum opening angle = 93
The Type BR 30a Pneumatic Rotary Actuators are equipped with a rolling diaphragm and
a central return spring.
Special features
Effective diaphragm areas from 600 to 1300 cm
2
Torques from 15 to 5619 Nm
Signal pressure up to max. 6 bar
Various bench ranges possible through continuously
adjustable spring compression or variation of the springs
No special tools needed to change the bench range
Direction of action (spring opens/closes) depends on attachment
to the valve
Externally adjustable stop screws to limit the opening angle
For continuous operation at temperatures from 35 to 90 C
Attachment of positioner, limit switch, solenoid valve, and other
accessories possible.
Figure 9.2.29.1.-1: Multi - Turn Actuator - Pfeiffer Type BR 30a
Actuator Type BR 30a
Version Diaphragm
Spring position Multi-spring, symmetric
Opening angles 90
Travel mm 55 to 120
Diaphragm area cm
2
60 to 1300
Spring range bar 2.5 to 6 bar
Spring torque Nm 16 to 4127
Temperature range 35 to +90 C / 31 to +194 F
Table 9.2.29.1.-2: Technical data of pneumatic actuator Single-acting Type BR30a
9.2.29.2 Additional equipment and add-on pieces:
For the actuators, the following accessories are available either individually or in
combination:
Positioner
Limit switch
Solenoid valves
Air supply stations
Pressure gauge set
Further accessories are available on request for customer
specifications. Details on request.
Figure 9.2.29.2.-1: Example illustrating the torque characteristic Actuator
size 3 with spring 1 at 2.5 bar supply pressure
Torque (Nm)
Opening
angle ()
Air torque M
dL
Spring torque M
dF
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Pfeiffer Type BR 30a Rotary Diaphragm Actuator
Type BR 30a Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Effective
diaphragm area
cm
2
60 105 125 240 470 780 1300
Travel mm 55 60 90 120
Opening angle 90
Table 9.2.29.2.-2: Technical data for Type BR 30a Rotary Diaphragm Actuator
9.2.29.3 Pfeiffer AT - Quarter-Turn Actuator Series BR31a
Application:
Single- or double-acting piston actuator
for control and shutoff valves with
rotating flow restrictor, especially with
high process demand in chemical
plants:
Quarter turn 90
Air supply to 10 bar
Temperatures -20C to 80C
The pneumatic quarter-turn actuators
Type SRP and DAP are piston actuators
for control or OPEN / CLOSED operation.
The actuators distinguish themselves by:
Externally adjustable end stops (4)
Square position diagonal (Europe. Standard) or parallel
Freely-adjustable position indicator (in 45 steps)
Assembly and modification without special tools
Encapsulated spring assembly
Transmission through involute gearing
Direction of rotation reversible without additional components
Proven surface refinement by means of Kesternich and salt spray test
Connection of additional equipment according to VDI VDE 3845
Attachments according to DIN ISO 5211
Versions:
Type SRP
Pneumatic quarter-turn actuator, single-acting with spring-return mechanism in the
sizes 15 to 10000.
Type DAP
Pneumatic quarter-turn actuator, double-acting without spring-return mechanism in
the sizes 6 to 10000.
Special designs:
With emergency manual actuation
For continuous operation at temperatures from -20 to 150C through use of Viton
O-rings
For continuous operation at temperatures from -40 to 80C with silicon seals
Figure 9.2.29.3.-1: Pfeiffer AT- Quarter Turn Actuator
Series 31a, Type SRP 220
Actuators with extended turning range 120 and 180
Dosage actuator with adjustable central position
3-position actuator
Actuator with hydraulic adjustment of rotating speed
Stainless steel AT quarter-turn actuator
9.2.29.4 Additional equipment and add-on pieces:
For the actuators, the following accessories are available either individually or in
combination:
Positioner
Limit switch
Solenoid valves
Air supply stations
Pressure gauge set
Throttling device
Further accessories are
available on request for
customer specifications.
Details on request.
9.2.29.5 Safety position:
For the actuator Type SRP two different directions of
rotation are possible, becoming effective by release
pressure on the pistons or in the case of air supply
failure. The viewing direction is from the actuator to
the valve.

Springs rotating to the right
In case of pressure loss, rotation to the right.

Springs rotating to the left
In case of pressure loss, rotation to the left.
The actuator Type DAP is designed without springs.
A defined final position is not achieved in the case of air
supply failure.
Figure 9.2.29.4.-1: Pfeiffer AT - Quarter Turn Actuator
Series 31a, Type SRP 5000
Figure 9.2.29.5.-1: Pfeiffer - Stainless Steel Ball
Valve BR 26 with Actuator Type SRP 5000
General technical data of Pfeiffer AT = AIR TORQUE, see Chapter 9.5.2)
Operation Single-acting Double-acting
Max. perm. air supply pressure 10 bar
Size
6 15 30 60 100 150 220
300 450 600 900 1200
2000 3000 5000 10000
Perm. temperature range Continuous operation -20C to 80C
Connection to valve DIN ISO 5211
Connection for positioner
or signal equipment
Type 15 to 150 VDI VDE 3845, Size 1
Type 10000 VDI VDE 3845, Size 5
Connection for solenoid valve VDI VDE 3845
Table 9.2.29.5.-2: General technical data for Series BR31a
9.2.29.6 Air drive torque
Figure 9.2.29.6.-1 shows the available air drive torque
Md
LE
for the single-acting version
Md
LD
for the double-acting version
and the available spring drive moment Md
F
in relation to the angle of rotation. The course
of the operating torque is valid for the correct combination of the respective air supply
pressure with the right number of springs.
0 45 90
100 %
ca. 66 %
ca. 33 %
0 %
Md
LD
Md
F
Md
LE
Figure 9.2.29.6.-1: Course of operating torque at recommended air inlet pressure
9.2.30. Pneumatic actuators of company VETEC Ventiltechnik GmbH
Model R
Model AT
Model MN
Model MZ Model MD
Model S
9.2.30.1 Diaphragm or rotary actuators
Actuator Type R AT MN
Version Rolling diaphragm Piston Diaphragm
Size
R110, R150, R200,
R250, R250V
SC/SO - 60, 100, 150,
220, 300, 450, 600,
900, 1200,
2000, 3000, 5000
MN200, MN300
Travel 128 to 200 mm 40 to 52 mm
Opening angle 75 75 Pivoting angle 75
Spring position
Centrally arranged
spring
Multi-spring, symmetric
Centrally arranged
spring
Diaphragm area 85 to 470 cm
2
36 to 2500 cm
2
298 to 678 cm
2
Spring torques 26 to 750 Nm 13 to 865 Nm 35 to 130 Nm
Supply air range 3 to 6 bar 3 to 6 bar 3 bar to 4 bar
Ambient temperature range
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +176 F
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +176 F
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +176 F
Mounting of accessories VDI/VDE 3845 VDI/VDE 3845 VDI/VDE 3845
Shaft of manual gear
for Type
R110, R150, R250
Manual gear for Type R250, R250V
SC 60, 100, 150, 220,
300, 450, 600, 900,
1200, 2000, 3000,
5000
Manual gear cannot be
mounted
Attachment type A
FTC - ATO FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC FTO - ATC
Attachment type B
FTC - ATO FTC - ATO FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC FTO - ATC FTO - ATC
Attachment type C
FTC - ATO FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC FTO - ATC
Attachment type D
FTC - ATO FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC FTO - ATC
Actuator pictures
For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.
Table 9.2.30.1.-1: Diaphragm or rotary actuators Type R. AT and MN
Diaphragm or rotary actuators
Actuator Type MZ MD S
Version Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm
Size MZ450, MZ700 MD450, MD700 S160, S320
Travel 100 to 130 mm 100 to 130 mm 29 to 54 mm
Opening angle 75 75 to 90 75
Spring position
Centrally arranged
spring
Multi-spring, symmetric
Centrally arranged
spring
Diaphragm area 1650 to 3580 cm
2
1610 to 3390 cm
2
160 to 320 cm
Spring torques 605 to 2210 Nm 885 to 8750 Nm 43 to 165 Nm
Supply air range 3 to 4 bar 3 to 6 bar 3 to 6 bar
Ambient temperature range
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +176 F
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +176 F
-40 to +80 C
-40 to +176 F
Mounting of accessories VDI/VDE 3845 VDI/VDE 3845 VDI/VDE 3845
Shaft of manual gear
for Type
Manual gear for Type MZ450, MZ700 MD450, MD700 S160, S320
Attachment type A
FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC
Attachment type B
FTC - ATO FTC - ATO FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC FTO - ATC FTO - ATC
Attachment type C
FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC
Attachment type D
FTC - ATO
FTO - ATC
Actuator pictures
Table 9.2.30.1.-2: Diaphragm or rotary actuators Type MZ, MD and S
9.2.30.2 Direction of flow, Actuator action, and Fail-safe position:
Direction of flow
FTC = Flow To Close
The flowing medium wants to close the control valve.
FTO = Flow To Open
The flowing medium wants to open the control valve.
FTO = FLOW TO OPEN
Medium opens
FTC = FLOW TO CLOSE
Medium closes
Actuator action
AIR TO OPEN (ATO) = Spring closes
stem and close the valve.
The valve opens when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force
AIR TO CLOSE (ATC) = Spring opens
stem and open the valve. The valve closes when the signal pressure is increased
enough to overcome the force exerted by the springs.
Fail-safe position
The control valve offers two possible fail-safe positions in combination with the
Diaphragm Actuator in case the supply air fails:
Valve CLOSED without supply air; the Rotary Plug Valve is closed when the supply
air fails.
Valve OPEN without supply air; the Rotary Plug Valve is opened when the supply
air fails.
Table 9.2.30.2.-1: Direction of flow, Actuator action, and Fail-safe position
9.2.31. VETEC Actuator Type R (rolling diaphragm or rotary actuator)
VETEC Actuator Type R
Actuator Type R Sectional drawing of Type R
Type R Actuator with mounted positioner
with shaft of manual gear
Type R Actuator with mounted positioner
with manual gear
Attachment Type A:
Air to open (ATO) Spring-closes
Attachment Type A:
Air to close (ATC) Spring-opens
VETEC Actuator Type R
Attachment Type B:
Attachment Type B:
Attachment Type C:
Attachment Type C:
Attachment Type D:
Attachment Type D:
Figure 9.2.31.-1: Manual gears and the different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type R
9.2.31.1 Principle of operation:
The Type R Actuator is equipped with a rolling diaphragm and a centrally arranged return
spring on the inside. The freely supported piston rod is directly connected to the lever for
the valve shaft.
The very long travel ensures high torques and very fine control. Its design allows the
actuator to be used on valves or butterfly valves with different opening angles.
The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops.
Actuator Type R110 R150 R200 R250 R250V
Version Diaphragm
Spring position Centrally arranged spring
Opening angles 75
Travel mm 128 184 200 200 200
Diaphragm area cm
2
85 165 295 470 470
Spring range bar 0.4 to 1.2 1.3 to 2.4
Spring torque Nm 26 73 144 230 747
Supply air range 3 to 6 bar
Temperature range 20 to +70 C or 4 to +158 F
Manual gear Shaft of manual gear Manual gear
Application:
High torques (1000 Nm), high
turn down ratios, fine tuning and
controlability, severe applications.
Table 9.2.31.1.-1: Technical data for Actuators Type R110 to R250V
Differential pressure p for Actuators Type R110 to R250V
For Rotary Plug Valves:
Type 73.3, 73.7
DN 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300
NPS 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12
Actuator Type R110 R150 R200
Spring range 0.4 to 1.2 bar
Supply
Air
Direction of flow
and actuator action
p in bar
2.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
60.0 30.0 14.8 15.0 7.7 7.0 3.8 2.7 1.6
2.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
141 83.8 41.3 31.7 16.3 14.2 7.8 5.4 3.2
3.0 bar 367 233 115 78.0 40.2 34.2 18.7 12.9 7.8
4.0 bar 124 64.1 54.2 29.6 20.5 12.3
Actuator Type R150 R200 R250
2.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
137 81.2 40.0 29.0 15.0 11.0 6.0 4.2 2.5
2.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
148 66.4 34.3 23.7 12.9 9.0 5.4
3.0 bar 156 80.6 55.6 30.3 21.0 12.6
4.0 bar 246 127 87.4 47.7 33.0 19.9
Actuator Type R200 R250 R250V
Spring range 0.4 to 1.2 bar 1.3 to 2.4 bar
2.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
276.0 136.1 51.9 26.8 39.7 21.7 15.0 9.0
2.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
109 56.2
3.0 bar 130 17.4 9.5 6.6 3.9
4.0 bar 204 49.2 26.8 18.6 11.2
Table 9.2.31.1.-2: Differential pressure p for Actuators Type R110 to R250V
9.2.32. VETEC Actuator Type AT (Rack and Piston actuator)
VETEC Actuator Type AT
(AT = AIR TORQUE, see Chapter 9.5.2)
Actuator Type AT Sectional drawing of Type AT
Type AT Actuator with mounted positioner
Attachment Type A
Type AT Actuator with mounted positioner
with manual gear
Attachment Type A
F
T
O
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
b
a
s
e
fo
r
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
F
T
C
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
b
a
s
e
fo
r
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
VETEC Actuator Type AT
(AT = AIR TORQUE, see Chapter 9.5.2)
Attachment Type B
F
T
O
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
b
a
s
e
fo
r
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
F
T
C
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
b
a
s
e
fo
r
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
Attachment Type C
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
F
T
O
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
b
a
s
e
f
o
r
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
F
T
C
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
b
a
s
e
f
o
r
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
Attachment Type D
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
F
T
O
M
o
u
n
t
in
g

b
a
s
e
f
o
r

a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
F
T
C
M
o
u
n
t
in
g

b
a
s
e
f
o
r

a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
ie
s
Figure 9.2.32.1.-1: Manual gear and the different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type AT
9.2.32.1 Principle of operation
The Type AT Actuator is a single-acting piston actuator. Thanks to different spring
combinations, the required torques for special applications can be implemented easily.
Its special design allows the actuator to be used with different opening angles.
Note:
The process medium can flow through the Rotary plug valve in either direction.
The standard direction of flow for:
Liquids = Flow To Open (FTO) direction of flow
Gases and Vapors = Flow To Close (FTC) direction of flow
The shaft/plug arrangement is eccentric (Figure 9.2.32.1.-1). The double-eccentric
design of the Rotary plug valve is achieved in combination with the offset of the plug's
pivot. When turning the plug shaft from closed position in opening direction, the double-
eccentric design allows the plug to lift off the seat smoothly without initial breakaway
torque. The valve is not opened suddenly and shows a stable control response even with
small opening angles. The rotary plug valve can be used for both directions of flow.
The flow coefficient is determined by the opening angle of the plug.
The inherent characteristic of the Rotary plug valves can be converted into a linear or
equal percentage characteristic using positioners and cam discs.
Figure 9.2.32.1.-1: Double-eccentric principle
Fail-safe position
The control valve offers two possible fail-safe positions in combination with the VETEC
Type AT Diaphragm Actuator in case the supply air fails:
Valve CLOSED without supply air, the Rotary plug valve is closed when the supply
air fails.
Valve OPEN without supply air, the Rotary plug valve is opened when the supply air
fails.
Actuator AT Type
SC/SO
60
SC/SO
100
SC/SO
150
SC/SO
220
SC/SO
300
SC/SO
450
Version Piston
Opening angles 75
Spring range
SC3 Nm 13.0 22.0 30.0 49.2 63 99
SC3/4 Nm 15.5 25.7 35.5 57.4 74 115
SC4 Nm 17.7 29.3 40.5 65.6 84 132
SC4/5 Nm 19.9 33.0 45.6 73.8 95 148
SC5 Nm 22.1 36.7 50.7 82.0 105 165
SC5/6 Nm 24.3 40.3 55.7 90.2 116 181
SC6 Nm 26.5 44.0 60.8 98.4 126 198
Temp. range
O-ring NBR (standard) 20 to +80 C
O-ring FPM (high temp.) 15 to +150 C
O-ring silicone 40 to +80 C
Manual gear Yes
Note SC = Spring closes, SO = Spring opens
Table 9.2.32.1.-2: Technical data for Actuator AT size SC/SO 60 to 450
Actuator AT Type
SC/SO
600
SC/SO
900
SC/SO
1200
SC/SO
2000
SC/SO
3000
SC/SO
5000
Version Piston
Opening angles 75
Spring range
SC3 Nm 135 190 255 433 655 1104
SC3/4 Nm 157 221 298 505 764 1288
SC4 Nm 180 253 340 577 873 1472
SC4/5 Nm 202 285 383 649 982 1656
SC5 Nm 224 316 425 721 1091 1839
SC5/6 Nm 247 348 468 793 1200 2023
SC6 Nm 269 379 510 865 1309 2207
Temp. range
O-ring NBR (standard) 20 to +80 C
O-ring FPM (high temp.) 15 to +150 C
O-ring silicone 40 to +80 C
Manual gear Yes
Note SC = Spring closes, SO = Spring opens
Table 9.2.32.1.-3: Technical data for Actuator AT size SC/SO 600 to 5000
Figure 9.2.32.1.-4: Sectional drawing of Actuator Type AT - Rack and pinion
9.2.33. New design features
AT the so-called rotating wing actuator is a special rotary type model. Instead of a piston
there is a sealed wing as a motion element which moves in a housing which takes the
shape of a quarter segment and allows a rotary motion of max. 90 degrees.
9.2.33.1 Vetec Type 62.7 AT short pattern with flanges
The economical VETEC short pattern valve
recovers the well proved idea of the Maxifuss
double eccentric beared design into a highly cost
effcient and simplifed version.
Due to the reduced applicability compared with
standard types 72.X and 82.X it is decreased in
the range of
Nominal diameters
Service temperature (max. 250 C)
C
v100
-values
Actuator sizes and p
Service media
Hence the use is for non-critical media only,
in the supply system of refneries. e.g. simple
water, gas, low temperature steam applications
9.2.33.2 Vetec Type 82.7 R short pattern with flanges
The new design features improve handling, function and meet international standards.
e.g. NAMUR
9.2.34. VETEC Actuator Type MN (rotary or diaphragm actuator)
VETEC Actuator Type MN
Actuator Type MN Sectional drawing of Type MN
Type MN Actuator with mounted positioner and Solenoid Valve
Attachment Type B
Attachment Type B
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
ATO (Air to close)
Spring opens
Figure 9.2.34.-1: Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type MN
The Type MN Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and a centrally arranged return
the valve shaft.
The short travel ensures very short actuating times. In addition, the actuator is designed
for very fine and precise control.
Actuator MN Type MN200 MN300 MN300 MN300V
Version Diaphragm
Opening angles 75
Travel mm 40 52
Diaphragm area cm
2
298 678 678 678
Spring range bar 0.4 to 1.3 0.4 to 1.3 0.4 to 1.3 0.6 to 2.2
Spring torque Nm 35 85 110 130
Temperature range
20 to 80 C or
40 to 176 F
Manual gear Manual gear cannot be mounted
DVGW MN
Control valve for control systems subject to the special
safety requirements applicable for gas supply.
For neutral gases acc. to DVGW working paper G 260/1
Table 9.2.34.1.-1: Technical data for Actuator MN size MN200 to MN300
Differential pressure p for Actuator Type MN200, MN300, and MN300V
Model 72.X, 73.X
DN 25 40 50 80 100 150 200
NPS 1 1 2 3 4 6 8
Actuator Type MN200 MN300 MN300V
Spring range 0.4 to 1.3 bar 0.6 to 2.2 bar
Supply
Air
Direction of flow
and actuator action
p in bar
2.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
37.6 77.6 38.3 10.9 5.6 3.7 2.0
2.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
153 248 122 35.4 18.3
3.0 bar 322 93.6 48.3 8.6 4.7
4.0 bar 152 78.3 21.6 11.8
Table 9.2.34.1.-2: Differential pressure p for Actuator Type MN200, MN300, and MN300V
9.2.35. VETEC Actuator Type MD (rotary or diaphragm actuator)
VETEC Actuator Type MD
Actuator Type MD Sectional drawing of Type MD
Type MD700 Actuator with mounted
positioner and Solenoid Valve
Type MD Actuator with manual gear
Attachment Type B:
Figure 9.2.35.-1: Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type MD
The Type MD Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and several symmetrically arranged
return springs.
The combination of several spring assemblies and the design of the piston rod bearing
allow high torques to be transmitted.
The short travel ensures very short actuating times.
The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops. A multi-
stage version is possible.
Actuator MD Type MD450
Version Diaphragm
Opening angles 75 to 90
Travel mm 100
Diaphragm area cm
2
1610
Spring range bar 0.65 to 1.10 1.15 to 2.01 1.56 to 2.72 1.70 to 3.40 1.71 to 3.13
Spring torque Nm 845 1250 1680 1910 1950
Table 9.2.35.1.-1: Technical data for Actuator Type MD450
Actuator MD Type MD700
Version Diaphragm
Opening angles 75 to 90
Travel mm 130
Diaphragm area cm
2
3390
Spring range bar 1.51 to 2.80 1.74 to 3.10 2.10 to 3.75 2.51 to 4.07 2.88 to 4.66
Spring torque Nm 4420 5100 6150 7350 8450
Table 9.2.35.1.-2: Technical data for Actuator Type MD700
Figure 9.2.35.1.-3: Sectional drawing of Actuator Type MD
Application:
Very high torques (9,000 Nm), high turn down ratios, severe applications.
9.2.36. VETEC Actuator Type MZ (rotary or diaphragm actuator)
VETEC Actuator Type MZ
Actuator Type MZ Sectional drawing of Type MZ
Type MZ Actuator with mounted positioner and Solenoid Valve
Attachment Type B
Attachment Type B:
ATO and Spring closes
Attachment Type B:
ATC and Spring opens
Figure 9.2.36.-1: Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type MZ
The Type MZ Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and a centrally arranged return
the valve shaft.
The short travel ensures very short actuating times. In addition, the actuator is designed
for very fine and precise control.
Actuator Type MZ450 MZ700
Version Diaphragm
Opening angles 75
Travel mm 100 130
Diaphragm area cm
2
1650 3580
Spring range bar 0.45 to 1.30 0.88 to 2.10 0.40 to 1.28 0.69 to 2.05
Spring torque Nm 605 1180 1305 2210
Manual gear Yes
Table 9.2.36.1.-1: Technical data for Actuator MZ450 and MZ700
Differential pressure for Actuator MZ450
Type 73.3, 73.7
DN 100 150 200 250 300 400
NPS 4 6 8 10 12 16
Supply Air
Direction of flow
and actuator action
p in bar
2.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
20.5 11.2 7.7 4.7 1.1
2.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
42.7 23.3 16.1 9.7 2.4
3.0 bar 98.3 53.6 37.2 22.3 5.8
4.0 bar 154 84.0 58.2 35.0 9.1
Supply Air
Direction of flow
and actuator action
p in bar
3.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
53.8 29.4 20.3 12.2 3.1
3.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
48.3 26.3 18.2 11.0 2.8
Table 9.2.36.1.-2: Differential pressure for Actuator MZ450
Differential pressure for Actuator Type MZ700
Type 73.3, 73.7
DN 100 150 200 250 300 400
NPS 4 6 8 10 12 16
Supply Air
Direction of flow
and actuator action
p in bar
2.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
48.7 59.8 32.6 22.6 13.6 3.4
2.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
100.3 121 66.1 45.8 27.6 7.1
3.0 bar 229 275 150 104 62.5 16.3
4.0 bar 162 97.5 25.5
Supply Air
Direction of flow
and actuator action
p in bar
3.0 bar
FTO - ATO
FTC - ATC
126 103 56.1 38.8 23.4 6.0
3.0 bar
FTO - ATC
FTC - ATO
113 160 87.1 60.3 36.3 9.4
Table 9.2.36.1.-3: Differential pressure for Actuator MZ700
Anti Surge Valve
DN 3" to 16" Class 300 RF, A216 WCC, A351 CF8M, A352 LCC, with positioner and
solenoid valve.
Control application, air to close (ATC) in 8 second, spring opens in 2 second, silencer
integrated, operation temperature -105 C to +150 C / -157 F to 302 F.
Figure 9.2.36.1.-4: VETEC Anti Surge Valve with Actuator Type MZ700
9.2.37. VETEC Actuator Type S (rotary or diaphragm actuator)
VETEC Actuator Type S
Actuator Type S Sectional drawing of Type S
Type S Actuator with mounted positioner
Attachment Type A
Type S Actuator with mounted positioner
and Handwheel, Attachment Type A
Attachment Type A
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
ATC (Air to close)
Spring opens
VETEC Actuator Type S
Attachment Type B
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
ATC (Air to close)
Spring opens
Attachment Type C
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
ATC (Air to close)
Spring opens
Attachment Type C
ATO (Air to open)
Spring closes
ATC (Air to close)
Spring opens
Figure 9.2.37.-1: Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type S
The Type S Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and one or more centrally arranged
return springs on the inside. The freely supported piston rod is directly connected to the
lever for the valve shaft.
Its design allows the actuator to be used with different opening angles.
Type S160 S320
Version Diaphragm
Opening angles 75
Travel mm 29 54
Diaphragm area cm
2
160 320
Spring range
Springs 2+3 0.9 to 1.8
Springs
1+2+3
1.6 to 3.4 Springs 1+3 1.2 to 2.3
Springs 1+2+3 1.7 to 3.4
Temperature range 40 to +80 C or 40 to 176 F
Manual gear
Table 9.2.37.1.-1: Technical data for Actuator Type S
Figure 9.2.37.1.-2: Actuator Type S with Rotary Plug Valve Type 72.1 with flanges
Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators Page 177 of 292
9.3 Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators
External Actuator Type SERVOVALVE
Actuator SERVOVALVE Series RCPM Sectional drawing of Series RCPM
SERVOVALVE Series RCPM Actuator with mounted positioner
Piston Actuator for torques 20.000 to 50.000 Nm
Figure 9.3.-1: External Actuator Type SERVOVALVE
All the Servovalve series of quarter-turn scotch-yoke actuators are designed and
manufactured for the transmission of high torque suited for Ball or Butterfly valves, Plug
etc. for on-off or throttling service.
In the central housing a slotted link kinematism provides to transform the linear motion of
the rod into the rotary motion of the valve shaft. The symmetric series are suitable for the
valves in which it is requested an exalted torque during all the stroke.
Therefore the canted series are available for valves in which output torque is requested in
the final released spring position (fail to close) or break compressed spring position (fail
to open).
Actuator Type SERVOVALVE
Version Single acting scotch-yoke actuator
Opening angles 90 5
Diaphragm area cm
2
254 to 865
Spring torque Nm 810 to 12610
Manual gear Yes
Figure 9.3.-2: The central housing is designed to accept different types of scotch-yoke mechanisms
symmetrical, clockwise or counter-clockwise canted. (Photo: SERVOVALVE)
9.3.1. Symmetrical scotch-yoke
RJPM and RSPM series are available for the on-off or throttling valves in which it is
requested an exalted torque during all the valve shaft running.
SYMMETRIC SCOTCH YOKE (SPRING CLOSE)
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
Closed 15 30 45 60 75 Open
U
N
I
T
A
R
Y

T
O
R
Q
U
E

Spring Fluid single acting Fluid double acting
Figure 9.3.1.-1: Typical output torque diagram with symmetrical scotch-yoke
9.3.2. Canted scotch-yoke
RWPM and RCPM series are ideally suited for the valves where it is requested an exalted
torque in a specific final position (generally closed position or failure position) compared
to the run and the opposite initial position.
CANTED SCOTCH YOKE (SPRING CLOSE)
0
0,5
1
1,5
Closed 15 30 45 60 75 Open
U
N
I
T
A
R
Y

T
O
R
Q
U
E
Spring Fluid single acting Fluid double acting
2
Figure 9.3.2.-1: Typical output torque diagram with canted scotch-yoke
9.3.3. Scotch Yoke
Figure 9.3.3.-1: Rotork Scotch Yoke actuator
1
0 90 180 270 360
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
- 0.5
-1.0
-1.5
Scotch Yoke
Crank and Slider
Displacment
Degrees
0 90 180 270 360
0.0004
0.0003
0.0002
0
- 0.0001
- 0.0002
- 0.0003
- 0.0004
- 0.0005
0.0001
Scotch Yoke
Crank and Slider
Acceleration
Degrees
Figure 9.3.3.-2: Comparison of displacement and acceleration for a Scotch Yoke compared with a crank
and slider Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Diagram: Rotork)
1 http://www.rotork.com
The Scotch yoke is a mechanism for converting the linear motion of a slider into rotational
motion or vice-versa. The piston or other reciprocating part is directly coupled to a sliding
yoke with a slot that engages a pin on the rotating part. The shape of the motion of the
piston is a pure sine wave over time given a constant rotational speed.
9.3.4. Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators
Figure 9.3.4.-1: Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Photo: Rotork)
Operating pressure
Pneumatic up to 12 bar (175 psi)
Hydraulic up to 210 bar (3,000 psi)
Torque Output 500 to 600,000 Nm (5.3 million lbf/in
Temperature Ranges
-30 C to 100 C -22 F to 212 C
-20 C to 160 C -4 F to 320 C
-40 C to 160 C -40 F to 320 C
-60 C to 160 C -76 F to 320 C
Table 9.3.4.-2: Technical data
Advantages:
The advantages compared to a standard crankshaft and connecting rod setup are:
Strong compact actuators for large valves and high torques
For On-Off and modulating
Double acting or single acting with spring return
Prepared for quick operation (extremely fast emergency)
Optional: Manual override
Fewer moving parts.
Smoother operation.
Higher percentage of the time spent at top dead center (dwell) improving theoretical
engine efficiency of constant volume combustion cycles, though actual gains have not
been demonstrated.
In an engine application, elimination of joint typically served by a wrist pin, and near
elimination of piston skirt and cylinder scuffing, as side loading of piston due to sine of
connecting rod angle is eliminated.
The disadvantages are:
Rapid wear of the slot in the yoke caused by sliding friction and high contact pressures.
Increased heat loss during combustion due to extended dwell at top dead center offsets
any constant volume combustion improvements in real engines.
Lesser percentage of the time spent at bottom dead center reducing blowdown time
for two stroke engines, when compared with a conventional piston and crankshaft
mechanism.
9.3.5. Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators
Figure 9.3.5.-1: Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Photo: Rotork)
9.3.5.1 Applications
Scotch yoke actuators are designed to operate ball, butterfly and plug valves requiring a
rotary, quartrer-turn movement for either on/off or modulating duty.
This setup is most commonly used in control valve actuators in high pressure oil and
gas pipelines.
Approvals and Industry Standards
Scotch Yoke principle gives high torque in the end positions
Temperature range -20 C to +80 C
High efficiency, low air consumption
Disadvantages:
Figure 9.3.5.1.-1: Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Photo: Rotork)
9.4 Electric with a linear or rotational movement
9.4.1. Electro-mechanical Actuators
The use of electro-mechanical actuators for control valves is widespread. One finds
them mainly in heating and air conditioning systems, power stations and waterworks and
everywhere else where a pneumatic pressure system is either too expensive and/or too
complicated.
This applies above all, to plants and applications where no protection against explosion is
required. Electro-mechanical actuators are available in a broad palette of different sizes
and gearing structures. Actuator thrusts and/or torques extend from a few kN (kNm) to
many tons of thrust and extremely high torque moments (MNm).
A simple electric motor which is generally operated by alternating current or even three-
phase alternating current serves as the actual drive. A step-down gear provides an
appropriate valve control rate (stroking speed) and corresponding actuator thrust. Motor
circuit breakers and thrust dependent switches prevent an undesirable overheating and/
or actuator thrusts which are too high. Position switches may limit the valve stroke to a
maximum travel. Thrust or torque switches enable electrical disconnection if the adjustable
thrust or torque is exceeded.
These actuators are often provided with a hand wheel or a cranked control handle in
order to allow manual operation to drive the control valve to the desired position in the
case of an electric power failure. Furthermore, a great number of options usually exist
with respect to the actuator movement, the required thrust or torque, nominal voltages,
direct or alternating current and so forth.
Typical electro-mechanical actuators for operating control valves are represented in
Figure 9.4.1.-1.
Figure 9.4.1.-1: Linear actuator Type SAM
Electric with a linear or rotational movement Page 185 of 292
Naturally, the different actuator types have design-related strengths and weaknesses
which are briefly described below:
Advantages:
No additional auxiliary energy (e.g. compressed air) required.
Very high actuator thrusts (torque moments) possible.
Robust and reliable in the case of standard conditions (e.g. climate).
Precise positioning in connection with positioners.
Self-locking gear assures a high travel rigidity (stiffness).
Simple overload protector applicable.
Disadvantages:
Expensive compared to pneumatic diaphragm actuators.
Low control rate (stroking speed) in case of higher actuator thrusts.
Explosion-proof attainable only at high costs (expensive).
Sensitive to moisture and corrosion.
No automatic failure position in the case of auxiliary energy loss.
No real suitability for extremely high and low environmental temperatures.
Proportional characteristics only in connection with positioner possible.
Figure 9.4.1.-2: Type SAM electric actuator attached to Type 3241 Valve
9.4.2. Electro-mechanical and electro-hydraulic actuator
Type 5857
300 N
Type 5825
500 N
Type 5824
700 N
Type 3374
2500 N
Type 3274
4500 N
Type 3375
7500 N to 12500 N
Series 5857, 5824, and 5825
Electric actuator for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems.
Actuator Type
5857
Three-point
stepping
5857
with
Digital positioner
5824
Three-point
stepping
5825
Three-point
stepping
Fail-safe function Without With
Power supply
230 V (10 %),
50 Hz
24 V (10 %),
50 Hz
24 V AC (10 %),
(50 and 60 Hz)
24 V DC (10 %)
24 V, 50 Hz
230 V, 50 Hz
120 V, 60 Hz
24 V, 50 Hz
230 V, 50 Hz
120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption Approx. 3 VA Approx. 5 VA Approx. 3 to 6 VA Approx. 4 to 8 VA
Degree of protection IP 42 IP 42 IP 54 IP 54
Protection class II II II II
Nominal thrust 300 N 300 N 700 N 280/500 N
Rated travel 6 mm 6 mm 6/12/15 mm 6/12/15 mm
Transit time for rated travel 20 s 30/20/10 s 18/35/36/70/90 s 18/35/36/70/90 s
Handwheel Yes Yes Yes Optional
Stem extends Yes
Stem retracts Yes
Connection to valve
Force-locking Force-locking Force-locking Force-locking
Form-fit Form-fit
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3
Digital
positioner
Input signal 0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
Out put signal 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
Permis-
sible tem-
peratures
Ambient 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C
At connecting
stem
0 to 120 C 0 to 120 C 0 to 130 C 0 to 130 C
Options
2 limit switches Max. 230 V, 3 A Max. 230 V, 3 A
1 potentiometer 0 to 1000 0 to 1000
Materials
Housing Plastic Plastic Plastic Plastic
Coupling nut Brass Brass Brass Brass
Actuator pictures
Table 9.4.2.-1: Electro-mechanical actuators
9.4.2.1 Electric Actuator Type 5857
Application
Electric actuator for heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems.
For force-locking Types 3222, 3222 N, 3226, 3267 and 2488 Valves (DN 15 to 25) as well
as special versions of Type 3260 and Type 3226 Valves.
The Type 5857 Actuator is a linear actuator which is controlled by either a continuous-
action signal or a three-point stepping signal.
Special features
6 mm travel
Supply voltage
Three-point stepping version: 230 V,
50 Hz or 24 V, 50 Hz
Version with digital positioner: 24 V
AC (50 and 60 Hz) or 24 V DC
Three-point stepping version equipped
with synchronous motor and maintenance-
free gear or version with digital positioner
equipped with stepper motor
Motor switched off by torque switches
Handwheel for manual override
Travel indicator
Digital positioners
Automatic initialization after applying operating voltage
Reversed direction of action by activating a slide switch
Current travel calculated over the transit time
Operational status and errors indicated by LEDs
Adjustable actuating times (10 to 30 s)
Blockage detection
Adjustable range of input voltage and output voltage
Configuration, parameterization, diagnostic function, and direct connection for
monitoring over TROVIS-VIEW software:
Direct data transmission over a connecting cable (direct connection with PC)
Data transmission over a memory pen
Figure 9.4.2.1.-1: Type 5857 Electric Actuator
(three-point stepping version)
Figure 9.4.2.1.-2: Memory pen 64
Figure 9.4.2.1.-3: Actuator Type 5857 with a digital positioner
9.4.2.2 Accessories for version with digital positioner
TROVIS-VIEW configuration software (6661-1061) for Type 5857 Electric Actuator
Hardware package with a Memory Pen 64, a connecting cable and a modular
adapter, order No. 1400-9998
Memory pen 64, order No. 1400-9753
9.4.2.3 Additional electrical equipment
The actuator is also available with a digital positioner.
Positioners guarantee a predetermined assignment of valve position and control signal.
A 0 to 10 V DC signal can be picked up at the brown (BN) and green (GN) wires for
position feedback.
The version with positioner allows the characteristic to be reversed and is suitable for
split-range operation.
1 8
2
4
3
6
7
5
1.1
1 Actuator
1.1 Cable
2 Handwheel
3 Actuator stem
4 Coupling nut
5 Travel indicator
6 Plug stem
7 Valve spring
8 Cover, serial interface
connection, slide
switch and LEDs
(only for version with
digital positioner)
Figure 9.4.2.3.-1: Principle of operation
Mounting position
The actuator can be mounted in any position, except suspended downwards.
Electrical connection
Connecting cable with wire-end ferrules
Technical Data of Electric Actuator Type 5857
Electric actuator for heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems.
For globe and three-way valves, e.g. Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 or 3226 Valves
in nominal sizes DN 15 to 50.
Type 5857 Actuator Version Three-point stepping version With digital positioner
Connection to valve Force-locking Force-locking
Transit time for rated travel 20 s 30/20
2)
/10 s
Nominal thrust 300 N 300 N
Power supply
230 V (10 %), 50 Hz 24 V
(10 %), 50 Hz
24 V AC (10 %), (50 and
60 Hz) 24 V DC (10 %)
3)

Power consumption Approx. 3 VA 5 VA
Manual override Yes Yes
Permissible temperatures
Ambient
Storage
0 to +50 C
20 to +70 C
At the connecting stem 0 to +120 C
Degree of protection IP 42 IP 42
Protection class II II
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3
Digital positioner
Input signal
0 to 10 V
1)

Position feedback 0 to 10 V
1)
Characteristic Linear
1)
Table 9.4.2.3.-2: Technical data
1)
Value can be changed in TROVIS-VIEW, refer to table on Settings of the digital
positioner
2)
Default setting
3)
10 s applies to 24 V DC (0 %, +10 %) for Transit time for rated travel setting
Figure 9.4.2.3.-3: Controllers with Electric Actuators Type 5857 with Globe Valve Type 3222
9.4.2.4 Electrical connection
GN green
RD red
OG orange
BN brown
BK black
YE yellow
Note!
Decoupling capacitors Ce in the
output circuit of the connected
controller may not exceed a value
of 2.5 nF in order to guarante
the proper functioning
f the actuator.
BN WH
aL
L
Actuator
N
Ce
eL
aL
Three-point stepping version
eL Actuator stem retracts
aL Actuator stem extends
Three-point
stepping signal
WH white
BN brown
GN green
Version with digital positioner
with 24 V DC
Ce
eL
GN
Control
signal
Feedback,
output
M
_
+
_
+ +
_
OG YE RD BK BN GN
24 V, DC
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
Figure 9.4.2.4.-1: Wiring diagram of Type 5857
9.4.3. Controller with Electric Actuator Type 5757
For domestic hot water heating
9.4.3.1 Application
Electric actuator with integrated digital controller used to position force-locking valves in
nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 25.
Domestic hot water heating control in instantaneous heating systems used in small to
medium-sized buildings connected to a district heating or local heat supply network.
The Type 5757 is a combination of a linear actuator and an integrated digital controller. It
is especially designed for DHW (Domestic Hot Water) heating in instantaneous heating
systems for small to medium-sized buildings. It is particularly suitable for mounting to
SAMSON Types 3222, 3222 N, 2488 and 3267 Valves as well as to special versions of
Type 3226 and Type 3260 Valves.
Special features
Control using two different set points, e.g. DHW temperature and DHW temperature
for thermal disinfection. A binary input is used to switch between the set points.
Function to maintain water temperature constant, preventing the heat exchanger from
cooling down between tapping
Direction of action reversible
Globe valve opens when the actuator stem retracts (increasing / increasing)
Three-way mixing valve mixes/diverts the flow(s) when the actuator stem extends
(increasing/decreasing)
Limit value monitoring
The valve is closed by the actuator when the maximum adjustable limit value is
exceeded
The frost protection function is started when the temperature falls below the minimum
adjustable limit
Configuration, parameterization, diagnostic function and direct connection for
monitoring over TROVIS-VIEW software
Direct data transmission over a connecting cable (direct connection to PC)
Special valve version available for small tapping amounts Accessories
TROVIS-VIEW configuration software (6661-1062) for Type 5757 Controller with
Electric Actuator
Hardware package with a memory pen 64, a connecting cable and a modular
adapter
Memory pen 64
Type 5207-0060 Pt 1000 Sensor
Sensor pocket, order no. 1990-9249
Flow rate sensor with extension cable with mating connector
Flow switch
1 Heat exchanger
2 Type 5207-0060 Temperature Sensor incl. sensor pocket
3 Supply from district heating network
4 Type 5757 Controller with Electric Actuator
5 Flow rate sensor with cable
6 Return flow to district heating network
7 Valve, e.g. Type 3222
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
VL RL
3 6
4+7
1
2
5
Hot water
Circulation circuit
Cold water
D
i
s
t
r
i
c
t
h
e
a
t
i
n
g
s
u
p
p
l
y
D
i
s
t
r
i
c
t
h
e
a
t
i
n
g
r
e
t
u
r
n
f
l
o
w
Figure 9.4.3.1.-1: Typical application: Type 5757 with Type 5207-0060 Pt 1000 Sensor incl. sensor pocket
and flow rate sensor
4 + 7
1
5
Cold water
Hot water
Circulation circuit
2
4
2
1
3
5
7
6
1 Heat exchanger
2 Type 5207-0060 Temperature Sensor incl. sensor pocket
3 Supply from district heating network (VL)
4 Type 5724/5725 Controller with Electric Actuator
5 Flow rate sensor with extension cable
6 Return flow from district heating network (RL)
7 Valve, e.g. Type 3222
8 Safety temperature monitor, e.g. Type 5313
(only in combination with Type 5725)
8
3 6
D
i
s
t
r
i
c
t
h
e
a
t
i
n
g
s
u
p
p
l
y
D
i
s
t
r
i
c
t
h
e
a
t
i
n
g
r
e
t
u
r
n
f
l
o
w
Figure 9.4.3.1.-2: DHW heating in instantaneous heating system, typical application with Type 5724/5725
9.4.4. Electric Actuator Type 5724 and Type 5725
Application
Electric actuator with integrated digital controller for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
systems.
For globe and three-way valves, e.g. Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 or 3226 Valves in
nominal sizes DN 15 to 50.
The Type 5724 and Type 5725 are a combination of a linear actuator and an integrated
digital controller.
They are especially designed for DHW (DHW = Domestic Hot Water) heating in
instantaneous heating systems for small to medium-sized buildings and for fixed set point
control circuits in mechanical engineering applications. They are particularly suitable for
mounting to SAMSON Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 and 3226 Valves.
The Type 5724 Actuator is without fail-safe action and Type 5725 with fail-safe action.
The Type 5724 has a manual override to manually move the valve in de-energized state.
Special features
Control using two different set points, e.g. DHW
temperature and DHW temperature for thermal
disinfection
Manual setting possible at the set point
potentiometer or over TROVIS-VIEW
Configuration and Operator Interface
Function to maintain water temperature
constant, preventing the heat exchanger from
cooling down since the last hot water was
tapped
Pump output to control a circulating pump or a circulation circuit can alternatively be
used as a fault alarm output
Direction of action reversible:
Globe valve opens when the actuator stem retracts (increasing / increasing)
Three-way mixing valve mixes/diverts the flow(s) when the actuator stem extends
(increasing/decreasing)
Limit value monitoring:
The valve is closed by the actuator when the maximum adjustable limit value is
exceeded.
The frost protection function is started when the temperature falls below the minimum
adjustable limit.
Configuration, parameterization, diagnostic function, and direct connection for
monitoring over TROVIS-VIEW software:
Direct data transmission over a connecting cable (direct connection to PC)
Type 5725-7
9.4.4.1 Type 5724
The controller with electric actuator without fail-safe action has a handwheel (2) used
to manually position the valve (only when the actuator is disconnected from the power
supply). Travel and direction of action can be read off the travel indicator (9) on the side
of the actuator housing.
9.4.4.2 Type 5725
The controller with electric actuator with fail-safe action is basically the same as Type
5724. However, it contains a spring assembly (8) and an electromagnet which in de-
energized state move the connected valve to the appropriate fail-safe position. The Type
5725 Actuator is only available with fail-safe action Actuator stem extends.
A handwheel (2) is not fitted. On disconnecting the actuator from the power supply and
removing the housing lid (1.1), you can use a key to adjust the actuator manually. As soon
as the key is released, the actuator immediately resumes its initial position.
0
6
1
2
1
5
1
5
1
2
6
0
0
6
1 21
5
0
100
50
8 9 1 1.1
11
2 12 1.2
4
3
B A A
B
1 Controller with
electric actuator
1.1 Housing lid
1.2 Cable entry
2 Handwheel
(Type 5724 only)
3 Actuator stem
4 Coupling nut
8 Spring assembly
(Type 5725 only)
9 Scale for travel indication
10 Plug stem
11 Set point potentiometer
12 Serial interface
(RJ-12 jack)
Figure 9.4.4.2.-1: Functional diagram of Type 5724 and Type 5725
Technical data of Electric Actuator Type 5824 and Type 5825
with integrated digital controller for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems.
For globe and three-way valves, e.g. Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 or 3226 Valves in
nominal sizes DN 15 to 50.
Actuator Type
5824 5825
-10 -13 -20 -23 -30 -33 -10 -13 -20 -23 -30 -33
Fail-safe action Without With
Connection to valve Force-locking Form-fit Force-locking Form-fit
Rated travel in mm 6 6 12 12 15 15 6 6 12 12 15 15
Transit time for rated travel 35 s 18 s 70 s 35 s 90 s 45 s 35 s 18 s 70 s 35 s 90 s 45 s
Transit time in case of fail-safe
action
4 s 6 s 7 s
Fail-safe action Stem extends
Nominal thrust 700 N 500 N 280 N
Power supply 230 V (10 %), 50 Hz 230 V (10 %), 50 Hz
Power consumption, approx. 3 VA 7 VA 3 VA 7 VA 3 VA 7 VA 5 VA 9 VA 5 VA 9 VA 5 VA 9 VA
Manual override Yes Possible
1)

Perm. ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C
Perm. storage temperature 20 to 70 C 20 to 70 C
Perm. temperature at connecting
stem
0 to 130 C 0 to 130 C
Degree of protection (upright
position)
IP 54 IP 54
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3
Binary input BE1
3)

Floating contact to switch between internal set points or to deactivate
the function to keep DHW at a constant temperature
Binary input BE2
3)
Flow switch
Binary output 230 V / 50 Hz, max. 1 A
Additional electrical equipment
Temperature sensor Pt 1000
Flow rate sensor 530 pulses/l
Flow switch Yes
2)
Alternative to flow rate sensor
Table 9.4.4.2.-2: Technical data of Actuator Type 5724 and Type 5725
1)
Manual override using a 4 mm Allen key (after removing the housing lid), always returns
to fail-safe position after safety release.
2)
The flow switch or flow rate sensor is not required in DHW heating in instantaneous
systems with a constant circulation. (DHW = Domestic Hot Water)
3)
Recommendation: Use devices with gold contacts when using relays.
9.4.4.3 Examples of electrical actuator Type 5824/5825 with various control valves
Type 5825
with three way Valve Type 3260
Type 5825
with Flow regulator Type 2488
Type 5825
with Valve Type 3222
Type 5825
Type 5824
Type 5824
with three way Valve Type 3226
9.4.5. Electro-hydraulic actuator
Electro hydraulic actuators include, in most
cases, a closed hydraulic system existing
of an electrical drive motor, a pump and a
hydraulic cylinder with plunger and actuator
stem. Position control is often integrated i.e.
a force balancing element with an electric
input signal of usually 4 to 20 mA and a
corresponding feedback via a range spring.
A flapper-nozzle system regulates, via a
special hydraulic high pressure valve, the
pressures within the double acting hydraulic
cylinder until the desired position of the
valve stem is reached.
A proportional relationship results in this
way between input signal and valve travel
(stroke of the control valve). Similar to an
electro-mechanical actuator, the direction
of movement and force can be reversed.
If a plant has numerous electro hydraulic
actuators, a central hydraulic unit is often
used. In such a case all actuators are
supplied centrally with a constant hydraulic
pressure.
Therefore, the individual actuators no
longer contain the pump, but only the piston
actuator and the positioner which regulates
the pressure on both sides of the piston
with high accuracy until the required travel
position is reached. Figure 9.4.5.-1 shows the details of an electro-hydraulic actuator.
Advantages:
Very high actuator thrusts attainable.
Relatively high control rate (stroking speed) possible.
High rigidity (travel stiffness) dampens oscillations of valve stem.
Automatic failure position in case of auxiliary energy loss.
Disadvantages:
Very heavy, extensive construction, expensive.
In most cases not every mounting position suitable.
Protection against explosion attainable only with high cost.
Unsuitable for extremely high and low temperatures.
Sensitive to rough service conditions, frequently maintenance required.
Figure 9.4.5.-1: Electro-hydraulic actuator
Type 3274
Figure 9.4.5.-2: Electro-hydraulic actuator Type 3274
Electric Actuator Type 3274, Type 3374 and Type 3375
For process engineering and industrial applications and they are suitable for mounting
on SAMSON Valves the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280.
Actuator Type
3274-1
Three-point
stepping
3274-2
Three-point
stepping
3374
Three-point
stepping
3375
Three-point
stepping
Fail-safe function Without With Without Without
Power supply
230 V (10 %),
50 Hz
24 V (10 %),
50 Hz
24 V AC (10 %),
(50 and 60 Hz)
24 V DC (10 %)
24 V, 50 Hz
230 V, 50 Hz
120 V, 60 Hz
24 V, 50 Hz
230 V, 50 Hz
120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption Approx. 3 VA Approx. 5 VA Approx. 3 to 6 VA Approx. 4 to 8 VA
Degree of protection IP 42 IP 42 IP 54 IP 54
Protection class II II II II
Nominal thrust 4500 N 4500 N 2500 N 7500/12500 N
Rated travel 6 mm 6 mm 6/12/15 mm 6/12/15 mm
Transit time for rated travel 20 s 30/20/10 s 18/35/36/70/90 s 18/35/36/70/90 s
Handwheel Yes Yes Yes Optional
Stem extends Yes
Stem retracts Yes
Connection to valve
Force-locking Force-locking Force-locking Force-locking
Form-fit Form-fit
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3
Digital
positioner
Input signal 0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
Out put signal 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
Permis-
sible tem-
peratures
Ambient 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C 0 to 50 C
At connecting
stem
0 to 120 C 0 to 120 C 0 to 130 C 0 to 130 C
Options
2 limit switches Max. 230 V, 3 A Max. 230 V, 3 A
1 potentiometer 0 to 1000 0 to 1000
Materials
Housing Plastic Plastic Plastic Plastic
Coupling nut Brass Brass Brass Brass
Actuator pictures
Table 9.4.5.-3: Electro-mechanical and electro-hydraulic actuators
9.4.6. Electrohydraulic Actuators Types 3274-11 to -23
Application
Actuators for positioning control valves. The electrohydraulic actuators receive three-
point stepping or continuous output signal from electric controllers. Nominal thrust up to
7300 N Rated travels 15 and 30 mm. The actuators are available with different thrusts.
Special features
Compact design including electric or optionally mechanical override.
Safe functioning due to force-dependent disconnection of the motor when final positions
are reached or when overload occurs.
Installation of positioner, potentiometers and electric or inductive limit switches in the
terminal box.
Optionally fail-safe action for version with electric override.
Versions with electric override (Figure 9.4.6.-1)
Electric override activated by two pushbuttons on the
terminal box
Type 3274-11 Electrohydraulic actuator with nominal
thrust F retracts of 2100 N in operating direction stem
retracts, and nominal thrust F extends of 1800 N in
operating direction stem extends.
Type 3274-12 F retracts of 500 N and F extends of
3000 N
Type 3274-13 F retracts and F extends both 4300 N
Type 3274-14 F retracts of 500 N and F extends of 7300 N
Versions with mechanical override (Figure 9.4.6.-2)
Mechanical override adjusted using an Allen key (width
across flats/SW 24) at the additional gearing housing
Type 3274-17 Fretracts and F extends both 4300 N
Type 3274-18 F retracts of 500 N and F extends of
7300 N
Versions with fail-safe action and electric override, operating direction of the spring return
mechanism according to Figure 9.4.6.-1.
Type 3274-21 F retracts of 2100 N and F extends of 1800 N operating direction of fail-
safe position: stem extends
Figure 9.4.6.-1: Electrohydraulic
Actuator Type 3274-11 to -14
safe position: stem retracts.
safe position: stem extends
Typetested versions
Type 3274-21 and Type 3274-23 Actuators (with fail-
safe action: stem extends) have been typetested
together with various SAMSON valves by German TV
according to DIN 32730. Register number available on
request.
Other certifications
CSA for version 110 V/60 Hz
NEMA 3
Versions with fail-safe action
have a spring return mechanism and an additional
safety solenoid valve which opens when the power
supply is interrupted, reducing the pressure on the
cylinder chamber. In this case, electric override is not
possible.
Override
The actuators are fitted with an electric or optionally a
mechanical override. Versions with fail-safe action are
supplied with electric override only.
Electric override
Figure 9.4.6.-2: Type 3274-15 to -18
Electrohydraulic Actuator with
mechanical override
There are two pushbuttons on the terminal box. Any
travel position can be reached independent of the
control signal. After the pushbutton is released, the
actuator reacts again according to the controller signal.
The control signal can be interrupted by opening the isolator terminal (81 in Figure
9.4.6.-6 to Figure 9.4.6.-8).
Mechanical override
The release button on the top of the actuator housing must be activated. An Allen key
(SW 24) can be used for adjustment. As soon as the release button is deactivated, the
actuator reacts again according to the controller signal.
All the electrical equipment can be accessed in the terminal box. Table 9.4.6.-5 shows
the maximum amount of equipment.
The housing cover is secured by special screws and must not be opened!
Electric positioner
The positioner compares the controller signal to the signal issued by a potentiometer.
The potentiometer signal is proportional to the travel. The output variable produced by
the positioner is a three-point stepping control signal.
Zero and span for normal and split-range operation are adjustable within a broad range.
The operating direction (increasing / increasing or increasing/ decreasing) can be
selected. By an external make contact, the final position "retracted" or "extended" can
be reached.
This does not affect the safety function. The positioner has an additional output for valve
position feedback.
Electric position transmitter
Output signal 0(2) to 10 V or 0(4) to 20 mA with potentiometer 0 to 1000 for versions
with three-point stepping signal.
Potentiometer
Actuators can be equipped with one or two
potentiometers. Versions with positioner require
a potentiometer for valve position feedback to the
positioner.
Electric limit switch
Actuators are equipped with maximum three overridable
electric or inductive limit switches on request. The limit
switches are activated over infinitely adjustable cam
disks.
Heating resistor
Heating the hydraulic oil increases the lower
temperature range. The heating resistor is not protected
by the internal fuse. We recommend that an external
fuse be used in accordance with the power consumption
data indicated on the nameplate.
Please also note the instructions for mounting positions
in the Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8340 EN.
Figure 9.4.6.-3: Actuator Type
3274 with three way Valve
Type 3260
Technical data of Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23
Actuator Type 3274 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 -21 -22 -23
Version with override Electric Mechanical Electric
Fail-safe action
Without
With
Operating direction
Stem
extends
Stem
retracts
Stem
extends
Rated travel mm 15 or 30 mm
Rated actuating time
60 s with 15 mm 120 s with 30 mm
(depending on temperature and required thrust
Half actuating time on request)
Actuating time in case of fail-safe action [mm/s]
Normal
-
1 1 1.3
Optional 3.3 3.3 5
T
h
r
u
s
t

N
With 15 mm travel
Stem retracts 2100 500 4300 500 2100 500 4300 500 2100 1800 500
Stem extends 2000 3400 4300 7700 2000 3400 4300 7700 2000 2300 3400
T
h
r
u
s
t

N
With 30 mm travel
Stem retracts 2100 500 4300 500 2100 500 4300 500 2100 1800 500
Stem extends 1800 3000 4300 7300 1800 3000 4300 7300 1800 2100 3000
Power supply 230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (both 10 %)
Power consumption 90 to 200 VA (maximum in version with half the actuating time and heating)
Perm. ambient
temperature
10 to +60 C Wider range (with heating resistor): 35 to +60 C
Storage temperature 25 to +70 C
Degree of protection IP 65
Control operation Duty cycling S4 according to VDE 0530/IEC 34 with 50% on-time
Electronics section of
motor
Radio interference level according to DIN VDE 0875
Mounting
Central attachment M30 x 1.5 Special version for Type 3214 Valve,
DN 150 to 250
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r
Power supply 230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (both 10 %)
Control signal 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA (Ri = 50 ) 0 to 10 V, 2 to 10 V (Ri = 10 k)
Zero shift 0 to 100 %
Change of span 30 to 100 %
Output (feedback) 0(4) to 20 mA, R 200 0(2) to 10 V, R 2 k
Potentiometers
0 to 1000 , 0 to 200 , 0 to 100 , 0 to 275 , 0 to 138
(when rated travel is 80 % of final value), permissible load 0.5 W
Electric limit switches
Perm. load
Maximum three separately adjustable limit switches
(see Table 9.4.6.-5) 250 V AC, 5 A
Inductive limit switches
Control circuit
Proximity switch SJ 2-N Values according to downstream transistor relay
(not included in delivery)
Heating resistor,
approx. 45 W
With thermostat, activated at approx. 10 C, deactivated at approx. 0 C
Table 9.4.6.-4: Technical data of Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23
Max. equipment combination (arranged by columns)
Electric positioner
Electric positioner
Potentiometer 1 1000
1)
1000
1)
1000
1)
1000
1)

Potentiometer 2
Electric limit switch 1
Inductive limit switch 1
Inductive limit switch 2
Table 9.4.6.-5: Additional electrical equipment
1)
Required for position feedback to the positioner/position transmitter
Figure 9.4.6.-6: Circuit diagram for actuators with three-point stepping signal
Figure 9.4.6.-7: Circuit diagram for actuators with positioners
N L aL eL e53 81 1.311.321.33 2.312.322.33
e a a e
"e" "a"
1
2
4
M
F
F
e
a
T
y
p
e

3
2
7
4
-
1
3
,
-
1
4
,
-
1
7
,
-
1
8
,
-
2
2
T
y
p
e

3
2
7
4
-
1
1
.
.
.
-
1
8
,
-
2
1
,
-
2
3
PE N L
M
F
F
e
a
N L aL eL a43 e53 81 82 83 1 11 13 32 31 33 2.31 2.32 2.33
1
2
4
a e
In Out
"e" "a"
PE N L
Safety interlock circuit,
only with Type 3274-2x
brown
green
white
- +
(0)4 to 20 mA
- +
(0)4 to 20 mA
- + - +
(0)2 to 10V (0)2 to 10V
Input
Control
signal
Output
T
y
p
e

3
2
7
4
-
1
3
,

-
1
4
,

-
1
7
,

-
1
8
,
-
2
2
T
y
p
e

3
2
7
4
-
1
1
.
.
.

-
1
8
,

-
2
1
,
-
2
3
P
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
Controller
with Type 3274-x only
H
e
a
t
i
n
g
r
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
Stem retracts Stem extends
H
e
a
t
i
n
g
r
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
retracts extends
Bridge essential
with 0(2) to 10 V
a43
M
F
F
e
a
N L aL eL a43e53 81 82 83 12 11 13 32 31 33 2.312.322.33
1
2
4
a e
"e" "a"
PE N L
- +
- +
H
e
a
t
i
n
g
r
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
retracts extends
Bridge essential
with 0(2) to 10 V
(0)4 to 20 mA
(0)2 to 10 V
Controller
with Type 3274-x only
Output
Figure 9.4.6.-8: Circuit diagram for actuators with positioners
Figure 9.4.6.-9: Globe Valve Type 3241 with electrohydraulic Actuator Type 3274-11
9.4.7. Electric Actuator Type 3374
Application
Electric actuator designed for use in industrial plants
and in heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems.
The Type 3374 Electric Actuators are linear actuators
available with or without fail-safe action. They can be
combined with valves from various SAMSON series.
Special features:
15 or 30 mm travel
Voltage supply 230 V or 24 V with 50 Hz or 60 Hz or
120 V/60 Hz
Synchronous motor with planetary gear
Motor switched off by torque-dependent switches
Mechanical override
Standard version
Type 3374 Actuator optionally available with either
integrated yoke or central attachment using a M30 x 1.5
ring nut including necessary coupling parts.
Typetested version
Actuator with fail-safe action "actuator stem
extends" for various SAMSON valves. Register
number available on request.
Further versions with
Two adjustable two-way limit switches
Two potentiometers
Digital positioner
Automatic travel calibration
Different operating modes can be selected
using selector switch
Setting by means of TROVIS-VIEW
Additional functions can be set and transferred using a PC or a memory pen
Characteristic either linear, equal percentage or freely determinable by entering the
desired points
Priority position
Action selectable when input signal fails
No further potentiometers are available for version with digital positioner.
Figure 9.4.7.-1: Type 3374 Electric Actuator
with integrated yoke attached to
V2001 Globe Valve
Attachment to various valves
A
With integrated yoke for
V2001 Series,
Type 3260 (DN 65 to DN 150)
Type 3214 (DN 65 to DN 250)
B
With central attachment for
Series 3240
C
With central attachment for
Type 3214 (DN 125 to DN 250)
Series 3240 (Type 3241 and Type 3244)
Figure 9.4.7.-2: Attachment to various valves
The electric actuators consist of a reversible synchronous motor and a maintenance-free
planetary gear with ball screw. The motor is switched off by torque-dependent switches
when the end positions are reached or in case of overload.
The Type 3374 Actuators with integrated yoke ("A" Figure 9.4.7.-2) are primarily combined
with the following valves:
V2001 Series
Type 3260 in DN 65 to DN 150
Type 3214 in DN 65 to DN 100
Type 3214 balanced by a diaphragm, DN 125 to 250
The Type 3374 Actuators with central attachment are primarily combined with valves with
yokes of their own:
Series 3240 ("B" Figure 9.4.7.-2)
Type 3214 balanced by a bellows, DN 125 to 250 ("C" Figure 9.4.7.-2)
9.4.7.2 Fail-safe action
The Type 3374 Actuators are optionally available with fail-safe action:
Upon power supply failure, the actuator stem extends
Actuator stem retracts
Upon power supply failure, the actuator stem retracts
Technical data
Type 3374 -10 -11 -15 -21 -26 -31 -36
Fail-safe action Without With
Operating direction
Actuator stem
extends
Actuator
stem retracts
Valve attachment
over
Ring nut
Yoke
Rated travel mm 30 15 30 15 15
Actuating time for
rated travel
1)

s 240/120
1)
120/60
1)
240/120
1)
120/60
1)
120/60
1)
Actuating time in
case of
fail-safe action
s 12
Positioning force
in N
Stem
extends
2500 2000
Stem
retracts
2500 500
Technical data
Type 3374 -10 -11 -15 -21 -26 -31 -36
Power supply
230 V, +10/15 %, 50/60 Hz
24 V, +10/15 %, 50/60 Hz
120 V (90 to 132 V), 60 Hz
Power
consumption
VA Max. 18
Switch off Torque-dependent
Perm. ambient
temperature
C 5 to 60
Storage
temperature
C 20 to +70
IP 54 according to DIN IEC 529 Suspended mounting
not permissible!
IP 65 with cable glands (M20x1.5 with metal nut
SW 23/24)
Overvoltage category II
Design and inspection EN 61 010 Edition 3.94
Class of protection II
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3
Manual override
Hex wrench No adjustment possible after fail-safe
action is triggered Manual override in actuators with
safety function only possible when op. voltage is
connected
Limit switches

Two travel-dependent adjustable limit switches
250 V AC, 3 A
Potentiometers
Two potentiometers: 0 to 1000 (900 at rated travel),
max. 1m Not with version inc. positioner
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r
Input and output 0(4) to 20 mA 0(2) to 10 V
Operating modes
Can be selected using selector switch Additional set-
tings can be determined using TROVIS-VIEW and can
be transferred using a PC or memory pen
Characteristic
Linear or freely determinable characteristic Adjustable
over TROVIS-VIEW
Travel adjustment During automatic initialization procedure
Interface
Data transmission with settings, operating status, error
messages per SAMSON interface protocol
sheet.
Table 9.4.7.2.-1: Technical data of Type 3374-XX
1)
Half the actuating time for actuators with 50 Hz mains frequency
Figure 9.4.7.2.-2:
N + L N
eL
aL
Ce
Ce
L
81 82 83
e a a e
Actuator stem retracts
Magnet for version
with fail-safe action
Limit switches (optional) Potentiometer (optional)
31 32 33 13 12 11 83 84 81 82 L N
L N
+ +
_
+ +
_
_
+
_
+
V mA V V
mA V
Limit switches (optional)
Position
transmitter
Input Binary
input
Binary output
max. 25 mA
Power
supply
Magnet only for version
with fail-safe action
Version for three-point stepping signal
Version with digital positioner
41 44 42 51 54 52
81 82 83 91 92 93
aL eL N N L
41 44 42 51 54 52
Wiring diagram
9.4.8. Electric Actuator Type 3375
This linear actuator is controlled by three-point stepping signals issued by an electronic
controller. It is suitable for mounting on SAMSON Series 3240 and 3250 Valves.
Versions:
Without safety function
Type 3375-10
Thrust: 12.5 kN
Rated travel: 30 mm
Nom. transit time: 50 s (with 50 Hz)
Power supply: 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Type 3375-11
Thrust: 12.5 kN
Rated travel: 60 mm
Nom. transit time: 100 s (with 50 Hz)
Power supply: 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Principle of operation
The electric actuators consist of an asynchronous motor and a maintenance-free planetary
gear with ball screw. The motor is switched off by torque-dependent switches when the
end positions are reached or in case of overload.
Technical data
Type 3375 -10 -11
Safety function Without
Direction of action
Valve connection over M30x1.5 M60x1.5
Rated travel mm 30 60
Transit time for rated travel with
50 Hz (with 60 Hz)
s 50 (42) 100 (84)
Power supply 230 V, 50/60 Hz 10 %
Operating mode (DIN VDE 0530) S3 - 50 % ED (1200 c/h)
Thrust [kN]
Extends 12.5
Retracts 12.5
Power consumption VA 180
Deactivation Torque-dependent
Perm. ambient temperature +5 C to +60 C
Storage temperature -20 C to +70 C
Technical data
IP 54 acc. to IEC 529 (IP 65 with cable
gland) Suspended mounting position not
permitted
Overvoltage category II
Design and inspection EN 61010 edition 3.94
Class of protection II
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3
Override Handwheel
Additional equipment
Limit switch Two pcs., 250 VAC, 3 A
Potentiometer Two pcs., 0 to 1000
sheet.
Table 9.4.8.-1: Technical data
M
>
c c
e e
*)
a
eL
aL
*) Only for actuators with safety function
41 42 44 51 54 52 81 82 83 91 92 93
e a e
L N L1 eL aL e53 a43
Figure 9.4.8.-2: Electrical Actuator Type 3375 - Wiring
9.4.9. Electro-mechanical Actuators - PSL Overview
PSL201
PSL202
PSL204
1 kN to 4.5 kN
PSL208
PSL210
8 kN to 10 kN
PSL214
14 kN
PSL320
PSL325
20 kN to 25 kN
PSL202/AMS up to 2.3 kN
PSL210/AMS up to 10 kN
PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators
For process engineering and industrial applications and they are suitable for mounting on
SAMSON Valves the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280.
Actuator Type
PSL 201
PSL 201.1
PSL 202
PSL 202.1
PSL 202.2
PSL204
PSL204.1
PSL204.2
PSL208
PSL208.1
Power supply
24V/115V/230V
50 Hz or 60 Hz,
24 V DC
24V/115V/230V/400V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz,
12 V or 24 V DC
Power consumption 25.9 to 41 VA 37 to 54 VA 44 to 68 VA 65 to 138 VA
Motor protection Blockable motor Thermal switch
Duty cycle as
per IEC 60034-1-8
S2 30 min S4 50% ED - 1200 c/h
Conduit entries M 20x1.5 2 pcs.
Enclosure acc. to
EN 60529
IP65 (Standard, customizing possible)
Nominal thrust 1.0 kN 2.0 kN 4.5 kN 8.0 kN
Rated travel 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm
Velocity (at 50 Hz) 0.25 mm/s 0.5 to 1.4 mm/s 0.5 to 1.4 mm/s 0.5 to 1.0 mm/s
Handwheel Handwheel knob
Handwheel diameter 59 mm
Pillar distance 100 mm (Standard, customizing possible)
Permitted ambient
temperature
-20 to +80 C, modulating duty up to +60 C
Position indication Rotation lock on mounting pillars
Mounting position Any position, except cover pointing downwards
Options
Positioner Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heating Resistor Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 limit switches Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 potentiometer Yes Yes Yes Yes
Position Yes Yes Yes Yes
Materials
Cover Polycarbonat (Standard, customizing possible)
Gear case High quality aluminium die casting
Pillar Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104
Feedback rod Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104
Actuator pictures
Table 9.4.9.-1: PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators PSL 201 to PSL 208
PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators
For process engineering and industrial applications and they are suitable for mounting on
SAMSON Valves the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280.
Actuator Type PSL 210 PSL 214 PSL 320 PSL 325
Power supply
24V/115V/230V/400V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz,
24 V DC
Power consumption 65 to 138 VA 43 to 55 VA 86 to 119 VA 86 to 119 VA
Motor protection Thermal switch
Duty cycle as
per IEC 60034-1-8
S2 30 min S4 50% ED - 1200 c/h
Conduit entries M 20x1.5 2 pcs. 3 pcs.
Enclosure acc. to
EN 60529
IP65 IP67 IP65 IP65
Nominal thrust 10.0 kN 14.0 kN 20.0 kN 25.0 kN
Rated travel 50 mm 65 mm 100 mm 100 mm
Velocity (at 50 Hz) 0.45 mm/s 0.45 mm/s 1.0 mm/s 1.0 mm/s
Handwheel Handwheel knob Handwheel
Handwheel diameter 59 mm 100 mm
Pillar distance 100 mm 155 mm
Permitted ambient
temperature
-20 to +80 C, modulating duty up to +60 C
Position indication Rotation lock on mounting pillars
Mounting position Any position, except cover pointing downwards
Options
Positioner Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heating Resistor Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 limit switches Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 potentiometer Yes Yes Yes Yes
Position Yes Yes Yes Yes
Materials
Cover Polycarbonat Cast aluminium Deep drawn steel plate
Gear case High quality aluminium die casting
Pillar Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104
Feedback rod Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104
Actuator pictures
Table 9.4.9.-2: PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators PSL 210 to PSL 325
9.4.9.1 PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators
The cover and switching mechanism design of the PSL valve actuators for a wider range
of applications, with more space for electronics and reduced cost.
The PSL valve actuators fulfil all requirements for control valve actuators with remarkable
efficiency. They position precisely, are very robust, reliable with long life, even at high
loads. The individual components are of high quality and correspond to the harmonised
European standards for machines and electrical equipment.
The basic adjustment of a PSL actuator on a valve is simple due to the central arrangement
of the switching and sensor units, which are easily accessible. Optional accessories are
quickly retrofittable due to the unique, perfected modular design.
Users of the PSL linear and PSQ quarter-turn actuators profit from the unified modular
concept of the accessories in several ways.
There are fewer parts which need to be held in stock and the training for the sales, service
and assembly personnel is reduced considerably.
1
2
3
4
6
5
11
12
7
9
8
10
Figure 9.4.9.1.-1: Modular accessories, easy retrofitting even on site
Characteristics for simple handling and for long, trouble-free operation which only PSL
actuators can offer in their class:
1
The tight cover, made of high-quality polycarbonate, sheet steel or cast aluminium
allows outdoor installation.
2
High-quality and high-efficiency motor used for a precise positioning and
controlling with high duty cycle.
3
Spur gear with minimum backlash and low wear for precise positioning of the
valve stem; high actuator output stiffness due to self-locking drive.
4
The proven disc spring coupling provides a defined setting force and tight closing;
the rotation lock serves as a mechanical stroke indicator.
5
The mounting pillars made of non-corrosive steel for simple, versatile mounting
to the valve.
6
Comfortable hand operation without switching from motor to manual operation;
the handwheel simultaneously indicates the operation and direction of operation
and helps during failure diagnosis.
7 Easily adjustable limit and signal switches.
8 Additional stroke switches or intermediate switches
9 Single or double potentiometer.
10 Space heater.
11 Electronic position transmitter.
12 Electronic positioner.
Table 9.4.9.1.-2: Characteristics for simple handling of PSL actuators
Figure 9.4.9.1.-3: Smart linear actuator with fail-safe unit on a globe valve
9.4.9.2 PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators
PS-AMS is the patented smart actuator solution of PS Automation GmbH for linear
actuators up to 25 kN thrust and quarter-turn actuators up to 1000 Nm torque. The
new generation PSAMS11/ 12/13 was developed from the proven PS-AMS01/02/03, is
available for various voltages, and mechanical adaptation to most types of valves can be
done.
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
Figure 9.4.9.2.-1: PS-AMS
PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators
1
Speed-controlled actuation
The output is generated by a 24 VDC motor, which is controlled by the electronics
via pulse width modulation (PWM), i.e. it is operated at variable speed. Absolute-
coded feedback is done with a precision potentiometer. PS-AMS standard
equipment comprises positioner and active feedback function, automatic
commissioning as well as comprehensive diagnostics functions.
2
Mechanical design
The mechanical part of the PS-AMS actuator consists of the components of PS
Automation's standard actuators with their well-proven components, namely
a robust spur gear with trapezoidal thread in PSL-AMS, and a high-reduction
planetary differential gearbox with a handwheel permanently engaged via a
worm gear in PSQ-AMS. All PS actuators are lubricated for life and therefore
maintenance-free.
3
Electrical connection
The electrical wiring of PSL-AMS is done directly
to terminal blocks in the integrated terminal box.
PSQ-AMS uses a plug-and-socket system with
robust screw clamps in a separately attached
housing. The plug can be removed without
interfering with any existing cables, e.g. for
maintenance or exchange of the actuator.
4
Parameterization by Software
Our concept of monitoring current and voltage
permits adaptation of the actuator functions to
the process conditions in many ways. Via our
communication software PSCS it is possible to
adjust valve-specific details, actuation thrust/
torque and speed, to configure alerts, and to do a
freely programmable valve curve correction.
5
Diagnostics function
The diagnostics function of the communication
software PSCS allows to retrieve counting values
(such as operating hours, number of start-ups
and running time of motor) and sets of running
parameters (such as the analogue set value input,
actual position value, currently required motor
torque and inside temperature of the actuator).
The actual values can be graphically displayed
and analyzed using the monitor function.
Thus the PS-AMS concept allows pro-active
maintenance and as a result an increase in
process safety.
We are currently preparing a combined monitoring
system which will also give a trend prognosis of
the wear situation of the PS-AMS actuator.
6
Wireless communication
Due to the continual further development
and optimizing of the electronics and the
communication protocol, the signal processing
inside the actuator and the communication to the
outside are now designed to work even faster
and more reliably. Communication is feasible via
special communication software PSCS from the
PC or wireless via Bluetooth protocol from PC or
PDA.
7
Status indication & Automatic
commissioning
The permanent optical status signalled by two
LEDs was revised in order to make the indicated
messages even clearer. All operating conditions
or fault functions are now uniquely signalled by
specific optical sequences.
Automatic adjustment is started in an user-friendly
way by a pushbutton.
Table 9.4.9.2.-2: PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators
9.4.9.3 Optional Accessories
Local control PSC.2
The optionally available lockable local control box
PSC.2 allows on site operation and can also be used
to set most of the actuator-specific values. The display
of actual position, messages and parameters of the
actuator is in full text.
Integrated process controller PSIC
The integrated process controller PSIC, available
as optional accessory, reads the signal of a process
sensor as actual value of the process and then
positions the actuator according to either a modulating
process set value, or a programmed fixed value. The
concept of PS-AMS using an electric motor with 24
VDC supply voltage facilitates a simple power supply
to the actuator via photo voltaic cells, allowing to install
a full control loop at remote locations independently of
supply and signal lines which may be difficult to lay.
Fieldbus / Bluetooth interfaces
The main board is prepared for the optional installation
of modules for all common field bus interfaces
or Bluetooth protocol, which enables wireless
parameterization and read-out of diagnostics of the
actuator at distances of up to 10 m.
Fail-safe unit PSEP
The fail-safe device PSEP is based on an accumulator
with controlled charger, so that a safety position in case
of loss of power supply can be freely defined without any
mechanical alterations to the actuator.
Table 9.4.9.3.-1: Optional Accessories
9.4.9.4 Mounting the PSL Actuator onto the Valves
SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, and 3280.
The standard actuator mounting method is described below. Mounting is simplified for
several types of valves for which special modifications to the actuator can be obtained.
Should this be the case, see the separately attached description for mounting instructions.
1 = stroke scale
2 = spindle nut with locking device
3 = safety pin
4 = coupling piece
5 = valve mounting plate
6 = fastening nut
7 = valve body
8 = valve spindle
9 = swivel nut
10 = disc springs
11 = mounting pedestals
The actuator and / or valve
11
10
9
8
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 9.4.9.4.-1: Mounting the actuator on the valve
The valve must be suitably equipped to take the mounting pedestals. Please see the
individual dimension sheets for the actuator dimensions. Observe the following steps
when mounting the actuator:
Unscrew the swivel nut (item 9) from the spindle nut (item 2) and slide it over the valve
spindle (item 8).
See if the bore of the coupling piece fits the valve spindle. If necessary, rebore and/or
recut the thread.
Slide or screw the coupling piece (item 4) onto the valve spindle and bore or pin to the
valve spindle (disc springs, see chapter 8.2).
Slide the valve spindle with the coupling piece and disc springs (item 10) into the
spindle nut, screw on the swivel nut and tighten down using the cross slotted key
supplied.
Slide the actuating pedestals (item 11) into the bore holes of the valve mounting plate
and tighten with the fastening nuts.
9.4.9.5 Type of limit cut-off
The type of limit switch cut-off is dependent on the type of valve and the limit position:
Force/stroke-dependent cut-off (cf. 9.2)
Stroke-dependent cut-off (cf. 9.3)
The force/stroke-dependent cut-off limit switches can be set by means of compressing
the disc spring coupling (Fig. 6 and 7).
Various types of valves require special couplings, which are described in a separate
instruction sheet enclosed. The following method of setting the cut-off is for a standard
coupling. Even here special variations are possible and where applicable, they are also
described in a separately attached sheet.
A B C
Figure 9.4.9.5.-1: Standard disc spring coupling
The different methods of arranging the discs are dependent on the type of valve. Three
different methods are possible:
A: Arrangement for a through-valve with "Valve Spindle retracting" as direction of closing.
B: Arrangement for a through valve with "Valve Spindle extending" as direction of closing.
C: Arrangement for a 3-way valve.
Basic rule:
For a through-valve, first set the CLOSED position force/stroke-dependent, then the
OPEN position stroke-dependent
For a 3-way valve set both limit positions force/stroke-dependent.
9.4.9.6 Force/stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off
Using the handwheel on the actuator, drive the valve into the limit position until the
valve cone touches the valve seat. This occurs when the valve spindle nut starts to
move axially and the spindle pushes against the disc spring force.
Mark the position on one of the drive support pedestals at the rotation protection piece.
Continue to drive the actuator in the same direction until the disc springs are compressed
to the required amount (see the specific data sheet for the drive) as denoted on the
spring/force diagram.
Slacken-off the fixing screw on the corresponding switching cam (Figure 9.4.9.6.-2),
move the cam towards the limit switch until it clicks, and re-tighten the fixing screw.
Check the setting by repeating the drive action to close the valve and check that the
spring discs are compressed to the correct stroke. Re-adjust the cam if required.
Figure 9.4.9.6.-1: Disc spring stroke
1 = Retracting spindle nut (OPEN)
2 = Extending spindle nut (CLOSE)
Figure 9.4.9.6.-2: Adjusting switching cams Figure 9.4.9.6.-3: Spring pressure graph
1
2
PSL214
Note:
3-way valves using the spring disc arrangement "C" (Figure 9.4.9.5.-1)
require only half of the spring stroke designated in the spring diagram!
Once the end position is established, glue on the stroke indicator scale
onto a drive pedestal.
9.4.9.7 Stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off
The spring discs are not compressed for the stroke dependent limit
switch cut-off.
Using the handwheel on the actuator, drive the valve until the end
required is reached.
Slacken-off the fixing screw on the corresponding switching cam
(Figure 9.4.9.6.-2, move the cam towards the limit switch until it
activates, and re-tighten the fixing screw.
Figure 9.4.9.7.-1: Segment Ball Valve Type 3310
with Electric Actuator and Handwheel Type PSQ 123
9.4.9.8 Electric Supply
The mains connecting cables must be suitably dimensioned to accept the max. current
requirement of the actuator, and correspond to IEC 227 and IEC 245.
The yellow-green coloured cables may only be used for connecting to earth.
When inserting the cable through the drive cable connector, ensure that the max. bending
radius for the cable is observed.
The PSL electric actuators do not have an internal electrical power switch. A switch or
power mains switch has therefore to be provided in the building installation. This should
be positioned close to the device and be easily accessible to the user and shall be labelled
as the mains isolator switch for the actuator.
The building installation must also provide for power surge trips or fuses corresponding to
standard IEC 364-4-41 with protection Class 1, for the actuator connections.
9.4.9.9 Wiring diagram
Figure 9.4.9.9.-1 indicates the electrical connections for standard actuators. The wiring
diagram inside the actuator cover is binding for the specific actuator connection. See the
separate wiring diagram in the corresponding service instructions for any optional extras.
X1 = Internal wiring
X4 = Potentiometer connection
for PSAP
X5/1 = Neutral
X5/2 = Motor phase to open
X5/4 = Motor phase to close
X5/6 = Thermo switch as potential-free
contact
X5/7 = Thermo switch as potential-free
contact
X6 = Additional position switch
X7 = not used
X8 = heating resistor
X9 = Potentiometer 2
PE = Earth connection on housing
PE
X10
X9
X8
X7
X6
X3
X2
X1
X4/16
X4/14
X4/15
X5/2
X5/4
X5/7
X5/6
X5/1
2
1
2
1
2
1
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Figure 9.4.9.9.-1: Wiring terminals
Two adjustable limit switches are installed to limit the stroke of the actuator, and cut-off
the motor current in the relative direction.
Most motors have a thermal switch, depending on the actuator type, to cut off the current
in both directions when a maximum temperature is reached (only at standard single
phase power supply). The thermal switch loop is closed by the bridge between the X5/6
and X5/7 connections (see Figure 9.4.9.9.-1).
If desired, the thermo switch can be wired to be monitored from the outside as follows:
Remove the bridge between connections X5/6 and X5/7.
Exchange the connections X1/11 and X1/13.
Make a conductivity check between connections X5/6 and X5/7(resistance has to be
zero)
Connect the thermo switch as potential-free contact to the connections X5/6 and X5/7.
9.4.9.10 Maximum thermal switch loading
The thermo switch can be loaded as a maximum to the nominal load of the motor (see
motor nameplate).
=
F
X6
L
R
S
X5
X4
X5
L
R
S
X9
t
t
X5
t
X8
t
1
6
1
5
1
4
12312 123456
Additional
Position Switch
Additional
Potentiometer 1
Additional
Potentiometer 2 Heating
Close Open
Position
Position
Close Open
M
1
M
2
0 1 2 4 6 7
L3
L
2
Position
N
Index B
L1
L
1
N
L
2
P
E
P
E
12 V / 24 V DC 3-Phase AC 1-Phase AC
124
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
1
1
2
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
Figure 9.4.9.10.-1: Wiring diagram
9.4.10. Electric actuators outside source
Linear Actuator Type SAM
2 kN to 25 kN
Linear Actuator AUMA
Thrusts from 4 kN to 217 kN
Electric actuators used in process engineering applications.
They are suitable for mounting on SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Valves.
Actuator Type
SAM
Three-point stepping
Auma
Auma
Mode of operation Linear Linear Part-turn
Fail-safe function Without Without Without
Power supply
230 V (10 %), 50 Hz
400 V (10 %), 50 Hz
230 V (10 %), 50 Hz
400 V (10 %), 50 Hz
440 V (10 %), 60 Hz
230 V (10 %), 50 Hz
400 V (10 %), 50 Hz
440 V (10 %), 60 Hz
Power consumption 60 to 337 W 80 to 750 W 80 to 750 W
Degree of protection IP 65 IP 68 IP 68
Protection class Thermoswitches (NC)
Thermoswitches (NC)
PTC thermistors (PTC)
Thermoswitches (NC)
PTC thermistors (PTC)
Nominal thrust 2 to 25 kN 4 to 217 kN 4 to 217 kN
Rated travel
15, 30, 60 and 120
mm
50 to 500 mm 50 to 500 mm
Transit time for rated travel 15 to 50 mm/min 20 to 360 mm/min 20 to 360 mm/min
Handwheel Yes Yes Yes
Connecting Thread
M30 x 1.5, M60 x 1.5,
M100 x 1.5
B1 according
EN ISO 5210
B1 according
EN ISO 5210
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
Noise emission EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3 EN 61000-6-3
Digital
positioner
Input signal
0 to 10 V
0 (4) to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
Out put signal 0 (4) to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
Permissible
temperatures
Ambient -20 to 60 C
-25 to 80 C
-40 to 60 C
0 to 50 C
At connecting
stem
0 to 120 C 0 to 120 C 0 to 130 C
Options
Limit switches
2 torque-dependent
3 travel-dependent
2 torque-dependent
3 travel-dependent
2 torque-dependent
3 travel-dependent
Potentiometer
1 or 2 piece
100, 200 or 1000
0 to 1000 0 to 1000
Heating resistor 15 W 5 W 5 W
Materials Housing
High quality
aluminium casting
High quality aluminium
casting
High quality aluminium
casting
Actuator pictures
Figure 9.4.10.-1: Electro-mechanical actuators
9.4.10.1 Linear Actuator Type SAM
Application
Figure 9.4.10.1.-1: Type SAM electric
actuators attached to
Globe Valve Type 3284
Electric actuators designed for control valves used in process
engineering applications. They are especially suitable for
valves of Series 3240, 3250 and 3280.
Nominal thrusts 2 kN to 25 kN
Rated travels 15 to 120 mm
These electric linear actuators contain reversible AC or
three-phase AC motors. The rotary motion of the motor
is transferred to the actuator stem via a gear unit and the
corresponding transfer elements.
Versions are available with 230 V AC or 400 V three-phase
AC motor for connection to three-point stepping controllers.
Transit times range from 18 to 144 seconds. The standard
versions include a mechanical handwheel.
The following limit switches and signalizing components are
included in the standard hardware:
Two torque-dependent switches
Three travel-dependent switches Optional electrical
equipment:
Brake motors (required for positioners)
One or two potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000
One electronic position transmitter with an output signal from 4(0) to 20 mA
One positioner with input signals from 4(0) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V Versions
Standard version with surface-cooled squirrel-cage motor for 230 V AC or 400 V three-
phase alternating current. Equipped with two torque-dependent limit switches and three
limit contacts. Motor with temperature monitor (optional for Type SAM -01 to -23).
Type SAM -01 and SAM -1x Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal
thrusts from 2 kN (SAM -01 and SAM -10) to 6 kN (SAM -13).
Type SAM -2x Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kN
(SAM -20) to 15 kN (SAM -23).
(SAM -30) to 15 kN (SAM -33).
(SAM -40) to 25 kN (SAM -42).
Type SAM -5x Electric actuator with 120 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15
kN (SAM -50) to 25 kN (SAM -52).
The actuator motor converts the output pulses
of the three-point stepping controller into steps
of travel. The length of these steps and the
direction of rotation depend on the quantity and
the sign of the control deviation.
The rotary motion of the motor is transferred
to the gear wheel via the gearing; the gear
wheel is shrunk on a bushing with female
thread. The top section of the actuator stem
which is provided with the matching male
thread engages the female thread. Due
to the rotary motion of the gear
wheel and bushing, the actuator
stem screws into the female thread
and performs a lifting, linear motion. The
actuators can be adjusted manually after
disengagement of the motor.
All versions are equipped with two torque-
dependent and three travel-dependent
limit switches which stop the motor when the
predetermined limits are reached. These electrical
components are housed below the sealed cover
where they are separated from the gearing and
protected from moisture and dust. They can be easily
accessed after lifting off the cover.
The torque-dependent switches (S1 and S2 in Fig.
4) switch off the motor when the adjusted force is
reached, e.g., when the valve plug rests against the seat
or when the linear motion is obstructed in any way. The
three floating travel-dependent switches (S3 to S5) issue
a limit signal when the adjusted limit values are exceeded.
Usually, one switch (S3) is used to limit the travel in the opening
direction of the control valve. Whereas the other two switches
(S4 and S5) indicate intermediate or end positions.
The electric actuators can optionally be equipped with two
potentiometers and/or an electric position transmitter with an
output signal from 4 (0) to 20 mA. They are
used for analog remote transmission of the
valve position. It is also possible to install a
positioner with input signals 4 (0) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V when AC brake motors for 230 V,
50 Hz are used. The installation and start-up for three-phase AC brake motors involve
considerably more work because additional external reversing contactors are required.
Figure 9.4.10.2.-1: Sectional drawing of
Electric Actuator Type SAM
Technical data
Type SAM- 01 10 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 30 31 32 33 40 41 42 50 51 52
Nominal
thrust
kN 2 2 3.5 4.5 6 6 8 12 15 6 8 12 15 15 20 25 15 20 25
Rated
travel
Standard 30 60 120
Optional 15 30 60
Speed of
response
mm/min 15 17 25 50
17
34
13.5 25
50
13.5
22
40
13.5 25
50
13.5
22
40
25 50
Connecting thread M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 M100 x 1.5
Degree of
protection
IP 65
Perm. ambient
temperature
-20 to +60 C
Table 9.4.10.2.-2: Technical data of electrical Actuator Type SAM
Electric connection data
Type SAM-
01 10
11
12
13 20
21
30
31
20
30
21
31
22
23
32
33
20
21
22
30
31
32
23
33
40 50
41 51
42 52
Speed of
response
mm/min 15
17
25
50 17 34 13.5 25 13.5 22 50 40 25 50
Motor and
power
consumption
in A
230 V/50 Hz 0.029 0.16 0.18 0.16 0.18 0.1 0.225 0.145 0.225 0.7 0.7 0.66 0.93
400 V/50 Hz 0.015 0.11 0.08 0.11 0.08 0.062 0.11 0.85 0.11 0.29 0.29 0.4 0.7
Version Synchronous motor
Asynchronous motor
1)
Temperatur
monitoring
Only on request, not required Bimetallic release
Table 9.4.10.2.-3: Electric connection data
1)
Actuators with positioner require brake motors

Electrical equipment
Standard version
2 torque-dependent switches
3 travel-dependent switches
Motor coil with temperature monitor (see Table 9.4.10.2.-3)
Options
1 or 2 potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000
1 position transmitter with output 4(0) to 20 mA
1 positioner with input 4(0) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V
(only with brake or synchronous motor)
1 heating resistor with temperature monitor
Table 9.4.10.2.-4: Electrical equipment
9.4.10.3 Electrical connection
The electric actuators can be connected in three ways: 1) via internal terminal blocks
(standard version), 2) via 32-pin terminal blocks in a terminal box or 3) via a compact
connector.
A 10-pin plug insert (silver-plated sockets and pins) is used to connect the motor; a 24-pin
unit containing either silver or gold-plated contacts is used to connect the limit switches
and signalizing equipment.
When a plug connector is used, only one potentiometer (R1) can be provided in case a
fourth travel-dependent switch (S6) is desired. The travel-dependent switch S3 must be
adjusted in such a way that the travel of the final control element is limited in the opening
direction by switching off the motor.
Klemmenanschlu
Figure 9.4.10.3.-1: Wiring diagram of Type SAM
9.4.11. Electronic actuators of Company AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG

Figure 9.4.11.-1: Oil and gas markets open for new AUMA actuators
Generation .2 products from the modular electric actuator specialist offer weatherproof
functionality (IP 68) and II2G Ex de IIC T4 has been gained for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
Enhanced functionality provided in the Generation .2 range that are advancements over
the companys original product series include extended lifetime, larger temperature
range and improved corrosion protection. Benefits for demanding applications include a
new coating offering superior corrosion protection at highest mechanical resistance and
a version for modulating duty offers an extended speed range / improved modulating
accuracy.
Development focus for Generation .2 centred on improved handling and operation. An
enlarged plug-in electrical connection provides improved connection facilities, a single
motor plug/socket connection is incorporated and AUMAs proven handwheel activation
was optimised.
Integral controls for Generation .2 actuators are equipped with Bluetooth interfaces. With
the integration of torque, temperature and vibration sensors, new intelligent diagnostic
functions supply significant actuator status information such as torque characteristics
which can be captured at any time. Actuator feedback signals can be classified according
to NAMUR recommendation NE 107 and integrated into Asset Management systems.
Full compatibility with the companys previous products is offered.
AUMA has a wide modular product range with electric multi-turn, part-turn, linear and
lever actuators, as well as several different valve gearboxes.
AUMA actuator controls, on request micro-processor controlled and available with a
variety of fieldbus interfaces, enable an ideal connection of the MOVs to the process
control. This makes it possible to find the suitable automation solution for almost every
valve.
Linear actuators are a combination of the multi-turn actuators SA and the linear thrust unit
LE. The linear actuators are available for open-close duty and modulating service:
Thrusts from 4 kN to 217 kN
Strokes from 50 mm to 500 mm
Velocity from 20 mm/min to 360 mm/min
9.4.11.1 Multi-turn actuators SAR 07.2 to SAR 30.2
Multi-turn actuators SAR 07.1 to SAR 30.1 are designed for intermittent duty S4 - 25 %.
Special versions for S4 - 50 % and S5 - 25 % are also available.
Actuators of the type range SAR 07.1 - SAR 16.1 can be combined with different controls.
From the simple OPEN-CLOSE control to the micro-controlled version with logging of
operating data or feldbus interface.
Figure 9.4.11.1.-1: Auma matic Type SA 07.2 to SA 16.2
Design features:
Torque range from 15 Nm to 4,000 Nm
Modulating range from 15 Nm to 1,600 Nm
Max. number of starts 1,200 c/h
Output speeds from 4 to 45 rpm
Limit and torque seating
Available with 3-ph AC, 1-ph AC motors
Handwheel for manual operation
Ambient conditions:
High enclosure protection
High quality corrosion protection
Wide ambient temperature ranges
Options:
Switches in tandem version
Remote position transmitter
Magnetic limit and torque transmitter
Mechanical position indicator
Interfaces:
Electrical connection via AUMA plug/ socket connector (optionally terminals)
Cable glands in different versions
Output drive types according to ISO or DIN standard
Applications
Power
Conventional power plants (coal, gas, oil)
Hydroelectric power plants
Geothermal power plants
Solar thermal power plants
Biogas power plants
Oil & gas
Exploration, offshore plants
Refineries
Distribution
Gas tanks
Tank farms
Figure 9.4.11.1.-2: Multi-turn actuators
SA 07.1 SA 16.1/SAR 07.1 SAR 16.1
without integral controls (AUMA NORM)
Torques from 10 to 1,000 Nm
Figure 9.4.11.1.-3: Multi-turn actuators
SA 25.1 SA 48.1 /SAR 25.1 SAR 30.1
without integral controls (AUMA NORM)
Torques from 630 to 32,000 Nm
Applications
Water sector
Sewage treatment plants
Water treatment plants
Drinking water distribution
Seawater desalination
Steel construction for water resources
Industrial and special solutions:
Air conditioning
Food industry
Chemical/pharmaceutical industry
Vessel and submarine shipbuilding
Steel mills
Paper industry
Cement works
Mining
Table 9.4.11.1.-4: Applications
9.4.11.2 Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators
The linear thrust unit converts the rotary movement of the actuator output shaft into a
linear movement. The combination of a multi-turn actuator and linear thrust unit forms a
linear actuator.
Figure 9.4.11.2.-1: Linear thrust unit LE
9.4.11.3 Range of application
AUMA linear thrust units Type LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 are designed for the operation of
industrial valves, such as e.g. Globe valves.
They are used in combination with multi-turn actuators on valves which require linear
travel. The linear thrust units convert the output torque of the multi-turn actuator into an
axial thrust.
As an option, the AUMA linear thrust units is available with damping device to compensate
for changes in length caused by varying temperatures, for example.
For other applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for any possible
damage resulting from use in other than the designated applications. Such risk lies
entirely with the user. Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of
the designated use.
Figure 9.4.11.3.-1: Globe Valves Type 3251 with AUMA SAR and linear thrust unit LE
Technical data for Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators
Features and functions
Type of duty
Linear thrust unit with multi-turn actuator for open-close duty (SA): Short-
time duty S2 Linear thrust unit with multi-turn actuator for modulating duty
(SAR): Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % based on maximum thrust for modulating
torque.
Self-locking Yes
Input speeds Refer to separate technical data
Versions
Standard: LH:
Clockwise rotation, i.e. actuator closes the valve in a clockwise rotation
Option: RH:
Counterclockwise rotation, i.e. actuator closes the valve in a
counterclockwise rotation

LE 12.1 LE 25.1 LE 50.1 LE 70.1 LE 100.1 LE 200.1
Thrust max. kN
1)
11.5 23 37.5 64 128 217
Thrust max. for
modulating duty kN
6 12 20 30 52 87
Stroke max. mm 50 to 500 50 to 500 63 to 400 80 to 400 80 to 400 100 to 500
Factor
2)
2.6 2.6 3.2 3.9 3.9 4.6
Base weight approx. kg 11 11 11 40 40 40
Valve attachment
Valve attachment Dimensions according to DIN 3358 (refer to Table 9.4.11.4.-3)
Output drive types
Thread of valve stem
LE 12.1 LE 25.1 LE 50.1 LE 70.1 LE 100.1 LE 200.1
26 x 5 LH 26 x 5 LH 32 x 6 LH 40 x 7 LH 40 x 7 LH 48 x 8 LH
Service conditions
Enclosure protection
according to EN 60 529
Standard: IP 67 Protection against short-time immersion into water;
max. 1.0 m for 30 min.
Corrosion protection
Standard: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently
aggressive atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration (e.g. in
wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
Option: KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere
with high humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating base Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Color base Grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Ambient temperature
Standard: 25 C to + 80 C
Options: 0 C to + 120 C (high temperature)
40 C to + 60 C (low temperature)
Special features for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
3)

The test to ensure the conformity with ATEX directive 94/9/EC were performed according to the
technical data. For other applications, please consult AUMA. 100 % load may only be applied for a
short time during opening and closing. During running operation, sufficient pause times have to be
respected. The type of duty must not be exceeded.
Technical data for Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators
Type of duty
Linear thrust unit with multi-turn actuator for short-time duty (SAExC): Short-
time duty S2, max. 3 cycles (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN) based on mean
thrust and standard ambient temperature.
Thrust max. for
modulating duty [kN]
LE 12.1 LE 25.1 LE 50.1 LE 70.1 LE 100.1 LE 200.1
6 12 153) 30 42 72
Explosion protection
Linear thrust unit: II2G c IIC T4 according to ATEX CD 94/9/EC Multi-turn
Actuator: II2G c IIC T4 according to ATEX CD 94/9/EC
Ambient temperature
Standard:
Options:
20 C to + 40 C
40 C to + 40 C (low temperature)
60 C to + 40 C (extreme low temperature)
only in combination with SAExC Combinations with actuators
SA(R)ExC at ambient temperatures > 40 C with special sizing.
Further information
EU Directives ATEX Directive: (94/9/EC) Machinery Directive: (98/37/EC)
Reference documents
Information Electric actuators and valve gearboxes according to ATEX
Dimension sheet LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 with SA(R) or SA(R)ExC Technical
data sheets LE with SA(R) or SA(R)ExC.
1)
for max. setting of torque switching at actuator, tolerance 20 %
2)
Conversion factor for torque (T in Nm) into thrust (F in kN) for a mean adhesion factor of 0.15
(T = F x f)
3)
For detailed information refer to separate technical data sheets: LE with SA(R)ExC
Table 9.4.11.3.-2: Technical data for Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators
9.4.11.4 Mounting to valve
Mounting is most easily done with the valve shaft pointing vertically upward.
But mounting is also possible in any other position.
Vertical mounting: On site, seal customer connection separately (e.g. with a roof
covering the linear thrust unit).
The linear thrust unit leaves the factory in position OPEN. The thrust rod is completely
retracted.
For Globe Valves, the mounting position is end position OPEN.
Thoroughly decrease mounting faces of both linear thrust unit and valve.
Fit linear thrust unit so that bores or thread of mounting flange align with .the valve
mounting flange.
Ensure that the spigot mates uniformly in the recess and that the mounting faces are
in complete contact.
Fasten linear thrust unit with screws (minimum quality 8.8) and lock washers. Fasten
screws crosswise with a torque according to Table 9.4.11.4.-1.
Thread M 8 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20
Fastening torque T
A
in Nm 25 51 87 214 431
Table 9.4.11.4.-1: Fastening torque TA
Connect coupling stud ( d 8) of linear thrust unit with valve stem. The type of connection
depends on the valve and is determined by the valve manufacturer.
h
3
h
3
h
d4 d4
d8
d9
d2
d1
H
L
2
L
4
d
3
"X"
"X"
Figure 9.4.11.4.-2: Connection
Valve attachment dimensions according to DIN 3358
1)
Dimensions LE 12.1 LE 25.1 LE 50.1 LE 70.1 LE 100.1 LE 200.1
Mounting flange F07 / F10 F07 / F10 F10 F14 F14 F16
d 1 75 / 125 75 / 125 125 175 175 210
d 2
55
2)
/ 70
f8
55
2)
/ 70
f8
70 g7
2)
100 f8 100 f8 130 f8
d 3 70 / 102 70 / 102 102 140 140 165
d 4 M8 / 11
2)
M8 / 11
2)
11
2)
18
2)
18
2)
M 20
d 8
M12 x
1,25
M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M36 x 3 M36 x 3 M42 x 3
d 9 42 42 55 70 70 100
h 3.4
2)
/ 3 3.4
2)
/ 3 3.4
2)
4 4 4
2)

h 3 / h 4 20 / 15 20 / 15 15 18 18 32
E 18 21 24 26 26 29
L 2 20 25 30 55 55 65
L 4 45 50 54 75 75 90
1) For option with damping device: refer to separate dimension sheet
"Linear thrust unit with spring-loaded damping device"
2) Dimensions outside DIN 3358
Table 9.4.11.4.-3: Valve attachment dimensions according to DIN 3358
Attachment of electric linear actuators with connections according to DIN 3358
Mounting to valve SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, 3280
Connection
acc. to
DIN 3358
F07 F10 F10/14/16
Electric
actuator
Outside
source
SAR/SARM
LE
SAR/SARM
LE
SAR/SARM
LE
Attachment
kit Item
numbers for
Valve Series
3240
3250
3280
1170-0354 1170-0395 1170-0356
1170-0357
1170-0358
1170-0359
1170-0361
Table 9.4.11.4.-4: Attachment of electric linear actuators with connections according to DIN 3358
Connection acc.
to DIN 3358
F07 F10 F14 F16
Series 3240
DN 15-150
15-80
1)

100-150
200/250 - 200/250 - 200/250 -
NPS 1/2-6
1/2-3
1)

4-6
8-10 - 8-10 - 8-10 -
Series
3250/3280
DN 15-100 15-100 125-200 50-100 125-250
3)
250-500
3)
125-250
3)
250-500
3)
NPS 1/2-4 1/2-4 6-8 1/2-4 6-10
3)
10-20
3)
6-10
3)
10-20
3)

Attachment acc. to
drawing No. 1170-
0354 0395 0356 0357 0358
2)
0359
2)
0360
2)
0361
2)
Suitable for
attachment to the
following electric
actuators:
2)
AUMA Type:
SAR/SARM
07.1+LE12.1
SAR/SARM
07.5+LE25.1
AUMA Type:
SAR/SARM
10.1+LE50.1
AUMA Type:
SAR/SARM 14.1+LE70.1
SAR/SARM 14.5+LE100.1
AUMA Type:
SAR/SARM
16.1+LE200.1
1)
Max. permissible thrust is 15 kN
2)
The attachment kit includes the standard yoke
with modified bore pattern
3)
DN 250, up to seat bore 200
Table 9.4.11.4.-5: Connections according to DIN 3358 for F07, F10, F14 and F16
9.4.11.5 Actuators without integral controls (AUMA NORM)
On request, the actuator is equipped with a mechanical position indicator which can be
used to view the valve position and also as running indication. The mechanical position
indicator is clear and fully legible, even from a long distance.
For AUMA NORM actuators, the actuator signals are exclusively
processed by the external actuator controls. If signals generated
within these controls are required as local indication, additional
display elements and signal channels become necessary.
9.4.11.6 Actuators with integral controls
Actuators with integral controls can also be equipped with the mechanical position
indicator. Furthermore, the controls are complete with indication lights, or, in the case of
the AUMATIC, a display, which indicate the operation status locally.
For more detailed information on local indication, refer to the following brochures:
Product description
Actuator controls AUMA MATIC
Product description
Actuator controls AUMATIC
The integral controls evaluate the actuator signals and operation commands and perform
the required switching procedures automatically and without delay, using the installed
switchgear, reversing contactors or thyristors. The controls make the evaluated actuator
signals available to the higher level controls as feedback signals.
Actuators with integral controls are ready for operation immediately after establishing the
power supply and can be operated via the operating elements.
9.4.11.7 AUMA MATIC AM
In its basic version, the AUMA MATIC is ideal for simple OPEN
- CLOSE applications.
The AUMA MATIC provides end position indication, the selector
switch position and a collective fault signal, all as feedback
signals.
The behavior of the AUMA MATIC can be adapted to the
application via programming switches, e.g. programming of
the type of seating.
Options:
Three-position controller
Fieldbus interface (Profibus DP or Modbus RTU)
AUMA MATIC local controls with push buttons, selector switches and indication lights.
9.4.11.8 AUMATIC AC
As well as the AUMA MATICs basic functionality, the AUMATIC offers some other
advantages, e.g.
Programmable signal relays
Non-intrusive setting (option)
Adaptive positioner (option)
Fieldbus interfaces for Profibus DP, Modbus RTU, DeviceNet, Foundation Fieldbus
(option)
Monitoring and diagnostics
Logging of operating data
Cable-based or wireless programming interface for connecting a programming device
Figure 9.4.11.8.-1: Operating and indication elements of the AUMATIC AC 01.2
AUMATIC local controls with push buttons for operation and programming, selector
switch, display with plain text display, indication lights and programming interface.
Figure 9.4.11.8.-2: A Step Beyond - AUMA Generation .2
With the Generation .2, AUMA introduces a significant further development for the increasing demands in
all types of process plants, from the water industry and energy sector to the oil and gas industry.
9.4.11.9 Electric rotary-type actuator for control service (AUMA RIESTER KG)
In order to meet the various standards 3 different motor versions are available. They are
based on the standard version of AUMA NORM and can be completed with a control unit
(MATIC) for 3-point or steady input signal 4-20 mA.
Actuators AUMA NORM for external motor
control
The external motor control switches on or off
the motor of the actuator by means of electrical
contactors or Thyristor contactor units.
The final control element can be returned to
the higher process controller by the actuator.
A position transmitter transmits the movement
of the final control element as standardized
analog position transmission.
This signal can be put at the disposal of the
process control as actual value of the position
of the final element control or for a remote
indication.
Actuators with incorporated motor control
AUMA MATIC
AUMA actuators with incorporated motor
control and local control station receive the
output pressure generated by the process
level. It concerns switch impulses switching
the motor on or off by electrical contactors
or Thyristorreversing units integrated in a
MATICunit in opening or closing direction
(clockwise or anti-clockwise rotation).
The feedback of the final control element for
the process controller can be carried out as
with the version AUMA NORM.
Final control element
AUMA NORM and
AUMAMATIC
Local control station
actual value
0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA
potentiometer
Switch impuls
External controller
Set point
(command variable)
Set point
(command variable)
External controller
AUMA NORM
actual value
0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA
potentiometer
Motor control
To controll room
Local control
station
Figure 9.4.11.9.-1: Actuators AUMA NORM for external motor control
Figure 9.4.11.9.-2: Actuators AUMA MATIC for external motor control
Actuator with integrated motor control
AUMA MATIC and positioner
The motorcontrol, local control station and
positioner are an elegant and simple solution for
the automatization of motor control. The higher
process level stipulates the set point signal. The
integrated positioner generates the set point
signal to position the final control element in
dependency of the set point and actual value.
The position of the final signal element can be
returned to the process level.
AUMA NORM
and
AUMA MATIC
with positioner
Set point
(command variable)
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Actual Value
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Figure 9.4.11.9.-3: AUMA MATIC
Torque switching Limit switching
DUO-limit
switching
Standard equiment
Precision
potentiometer
in simple
or tandem
version
Position
transmission
Reduction
gearing
Tandem
switching
Heater
Accessories
Mechanic
position
indication
Figure 9.4.11.9.-4: AUMA NORM
9.4.11.10 Electric rotary-type actuator for control service
In order to meet the various standards 3 different motor versions are available. They are
based on the standard version of AUMA NORM and can be completed with a control unit
(MATIC) for 3-point or steady input signal 4-20 mA.
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.2 - 16.2 NORM
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.2 - 16.2 AUMA MATIC AC 01.2 BUS
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.2 - 16.2 MATIC AM 01.2
Figure 9.4.11.10.-1: Multi-turn actuators Generation .2
9.4.11.11 Standard version
The switches are put on terminals and must be wired up with the reversing unit in the field
(with the exception of AUMA-MATIC).
Limit switching:
for switching off in the end positions open and closed. The positions can be adjusted
separately, quickly and safely. The limit switching is suited for the range 2-500 turns
per travel.
Torque switching:
for switching off the end positions when reaching the adjusted torque. At the same
time the torque switching acts as overload protection for the driven valve over the
whole travel. The required tripping torque can easily be set at the corresponding dial
(in da Nm) for open and close.
Switching capacity standard control switch
Type of current Switching capacity l
max

30 V 125 V 250 V
AC (inductive load) cos = 0.8 8 A 6 A 5 A
DC (ohmic load) 2 A 0.6 A 0.4 A
Table 9.4.11.11.-1:
9.4.11.12 Accessories
Tandem switches:
Used for switching different potentials. There are two compartments with galvanic
separate switches in a housing. Both switches are operated simultaneously, thereby
a determined switch sequence exists. One switch which is leading should be used for
signalization.
Switching capacity tandem switches
Type of current Switching capacity l
max

30 V 125 V 250 V
AC (inductive load) cos = 0.8 8 A 6 A 5 A
DC (ohmic load) 2 A 0.6 A 0.4 A
Table 9.4.11.12.-1:
DUO-limit switching
for generating additional signals in any tow adjustable intermediate positions
whatever.
Mechanical position indicator at the actuator
The exact valve position is continuously indicated by a disc bearing the adjustable
symbols for open and closed. This indicator disc is visible through an indicator glass
in the switch compartment cover.
Reduction gearing
for the mechanical position indication and or electrical position transmission. With this
the entire valve travel is reduced to less than one full turn.
Precision potentiometer
for the analog position transmission. The potentiometer with high linearity provides a
proportional feedback signal being proportional to the travel.
Electrical position transducer type RWG or inductive IWG
for position transmission by an standard signal of 0/4 to 20 mA. Zero and span can
be set at the electrical board.
Space heater
By integrating a self-regulating space heater in the switch department condensation
is almost avoided during considerable temperature variation.
9.4.11.13 Motor
Three-phase motor
AUMA multi-turn actuators are serialized with three-phase motors (pot-type motor
without fan).
Technical data
Three-phase motor
Standard voltage
(Only three-phase current)
380 V/50 Hz; (220 V/50 Hz); 415 V/50 Hz;
500 V/50 Hz; 440 V/60 Hz; 460 V/60 Hz
Perm. Fluctuations max. 5%
1)

Style IM B9 according to DIN IEC 34 part 7
Motor type Cage type
Degree of protection IP67 (attached to actuator)
Cooling method Natural cooling/surface cooling
Insulation class F according to VDE 0530
Electrical connection Up to SA 16.1: plug-in connector at actuator
Running time Direct
Turn-on mode
S4 - 25% relative running time ED, starting frequency for
SAR see technical data
Sense of direction Right and left (reversing)
Motor protection 3 thermo switches (standard) or thermistors
Table 9.4.11.13.-1:
1)
Overvoltage and or too high frequencies can result in an inadmissible heating of the
motor. In case of undervoltage the torque of the motor (breakdown moment) is reduced
in quadratic proportion concerning the voltage dropping. When choosing the actuators
you have to consider the high voltage fluctuations.
Position transmission
A position transmission is only possible in combination with a reduction gearing.
Precision potentiometer
Technical specifications
Standard data: 0.2 kW; 1.5 W
Option: 0.1 kW; 1.0 kW or 5.0 kW available
Linearity: 1 %.
Precision potentiometer in tandem version
Standard data: 0.2/0.2 kW; 1.5 W
Option: 0.5/0.5 kW; 1.0/1.0 kW; 5.0/5.0 kW or 0.2/5.0 kW available
Linearity: 1 %.
Precision potentiometer with semi-conducting layer
Standard data: 5.0 kw; 1.5 W
Linearity: 1 %.
Precision potentiometer with semi-conducting layer in tandem version
Standard value: 4.7/4.7 kW; 1.5 W
Option: 1.0/4.7 kW;
Linearity: 1 %.
When using a positioner a precision potentiometer with a semi-conducting layer
or an electrical/inductive position transmission (3/4-wire system with isolating
transformer has to be used.
When using the potentiometer for regulating you must use a precision potentiometer
with a semi-conducting layer because of the low temperature drift.
A mechanical restriction of the reduction gearing makes it impossible that the potentiometer
Reaches the max. Value of resistance. Therefore, an external electrical balance is to be
installed.
Electronic position transducer RWG
The actual value of the valve measured by an transducer is converted into injected
current by electronic devices. Zero and rate of rise of the position transmission can be
easily set by a trimming potentiometer.
Output signal
2-wire system 4 to 20 mA
3- or 4- wire system 0/4 to 20 mA
Voltage supply 24 V DC 15 % smoothened
Ambient temperature -20 C up to +60 C
Table 9.4.11.13.-2:
Inductive position transmitter system IWG
The inductive position transmitter system operates without movable contact. The actual
value of the valve is transmitted to the IWG constructed according to the principle of
differential transformers. The signal is converted into injected current by electronic
devices. Zero and rate of rise of the position transmission can be set.
Output signal
2-wire system 4 to 20 mA
3- or 4- wire system 0/4 to 20 mA
Voltage supply 24 V DC 15 % smoothened
Ambient temperature -20 C up to +60 C
Table 9.4.11.13.-3:
The electronic transducer RWG and inductive position transmitter IWG can be operated
alternatively as 2-, 3- or 4-wire system for 0 to 20 mA (only 3- and 4-wire system) or 4 to
20 mA. An adaption in the field is possible at any time.
When using MATIC-Unit with positioner a 3- or 4-wire system can be used. An electronic/
inductive position transmission (3- or 4-wire system) with isolating transformer is to be
installed if a constant position transmission (0/4 to 20 mA) is required.
Figure 9.4.11.13.-4: Multi-turn actuators Generation .2 - AUMA MORM
9.4.11.14 AUMA MATIC
AUMA MATIC Universal AM-U
Nominal power unit
Load relay Reversing contactors Thyristor reversing unit
Interlock Mechanical and electric Electronic
Max. Voltage 500 VAC 460 VAC
Max. Nominal output 7.5 kW 1.5 kW
Control
Actuator for regulation
1)

remote control (supply)
24 V DC supplied from
external sources
24 V DC supplied from
external sources
Max. Pickup delay
2)
20 ms 20 ms
Max. Delay in
disconnection
2)

40 ms 25 ms
Transmission position to
control room
On-off On-off
Position transmission to
control room
End positions
Selector switch in positions local / remote
Collective fault signal
Supervision
3)

Power failure
Motor protection in operation (thermoswitch)
Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
Wrong phase sequence or phase failure (option)
Selector switch local-off-remote / automatic (lockable)
Control switch open-stop-close
Positioner
4)
4 to 20 mA / 0 to 20 mA (option)
Table 9.4.11.14.-1: AUMA MATIC
1)
Only without positioner
2)
Time delay with remote control
3)
The multi-return actuator is switched off during the above mentioned faults. The causes
are indicated by 2 integrated LEDs (light-emitting diodes) in the motor control AUMA
MATIC and can be transmitted as collective fault signal to the control room.
4)
Only with precision potentiometer with semi-conducting layer
Figure 9.4.11.14.-2: AUMA MATIC
AUMA regulating actuators are rated for intermittent duty S4 - 25%, permissible number
of starts see Figure 9.4.11.10.-1 and Table 9.4.11.14.-1 (description running time ED see
enclosure E)
Enclosure A: Electrical data for auma three-phase motors
Enclosure B: Electrical data for AUMA-Ex three-phase motors
Enclosure C: Motor control AUMA MATIC without positioner and with reversing
contactor MSP 110AC1--F11E1/KMS TP104/201
Enclosure D: Motor control AUMA MATIC with positioner and thyristor reversing
contactor MSP 111700--A21E1/KMS TP140/241
Enclosure E: Intermittent duty under the influence of starting process (S 4)
Torque
during
service
max. Nm
Type speed
1/min
Nominal
input
kW
Speed
1/min
Size
380 V, 50 Hz
Current at
Nominal
current
Tripping
torque
1)

Starting
A (l
N
) A (ca) A (l
A
)
15
SAR 07.1- to 4 0.025 700 63 0.40 0.40 0.68
SAR 07.1- to 5.6 0.025 700 63 0.40 0.40 0.68
SAR 07.1- to 8 0.045 1400 63 0.38 0.40 0.95
SAR 07.1- to 11 0.045 1400 63 0.38 0.40 0.95
30
SAR 07.5- to 4 0.045 700 63 0.63 0.65 1.0
SAR 07.5- to 5.6 0.045 700 63 0.63 0.65 1.0
SAR 07.5- to 8 0.09 1400 63 0.54 0.60 1.6
SAR 07.5- to 11 0.09 1400 63 0.54 0.60 1.6
60
SAR 10.1- to 4 0.09 700 71 0.89 0.90 1.7
SAR 10.1- to 5.6 0.09 700 71 0.89 0.95 1.7
SAR 10.1- to 8 0.18 1400 71 1.0 1.1 3.0
SAR 10.1- to 11 0.18 1400 71 1.0 1.2 3.0
Torque
during
service
max. Nm
Type speed
1/min
Nominal
input
kW
Speed
1/min
Size
380 V, 50 Hz
Current at
Nominal
current
Tripping
torque
1)

Starting
A (l
N
) A (ca) A (l
A
)
120
SAR 14.1- to 4 0.18 700 90 1.8 2.0 4.5
SAR 14.1- to 5.6 0.18 700 90 1.8 2.0 4.5
SAR 14.1- to 8 0.37 1400 90 1.1 1.7 4.8
SAR 14.1- to 11 0.37 1400 90 1.1 1.8 4.8
SAR 14.1- to 16 0.75 2800 90 1.9 3.5 8.9
SAR 14.1- to 22 0.75 2800 90 1.9 3.8 8.9
200
SAR 14.5- to 4 0.37 700 90 2.5 2.8 6.0
SAR 14.5- to 5.6 0.37 700 90 2.5 3.0 6.0
SAR 14.5- to 8 0.75 1400 90 2.3 3.6 9.2
SAR 14.5- to 11 0.75 1400 90 2.3 3.9 9.2
SAR 14.5- to 16 1.5 2800 90 4.3 7.0 18
SAR 14.5- to 22 1.5 2800 90 4.3 7.5 18
400
SAR 16.1- to 4 0.75 700 90 4.0 4.8 10
SAR 16.1- to 5.6 0.75 700 90 4.0 5.0 10
SAR 16.1- to 8 1.5 1400 90 3.6 6.5 16
SAR 16.1- to 11 1.5 1400 90 3.6 7.4 16
SAR 16.1- to 16 3.0 2800 90 7.6 15 38
SAR 16.1- to 22 3.0 2800 90 7.6 16 38
Table 9.4.11.14.-3: Technical data of Type SAR
1)
We recommend to select switch gear and cables suitable for these values.
Permissible fluctuations of nominal voltage: 5 %. If voltage drops below there will be a
reduction of nominal output torque.
Attention!
AUMA pot-type motors are serialized with 3 thermoswitches or with ex-actuators
also PTC-thermistor to protect the windings (refer to terminal plans KMS). Our
warranty will lapse if those thermoswitches are not connected in the control circuit.
Note:
For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical AUMA
data sheet and SAMSON TV-SK 9386-2, 9393 -2, 9394-1 / TV-SK 9402-1 E.
9.4.11.15 Wiring diagram AM4R AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1
Figure 9.4.11.15.-1: Wiring diagram AM4R AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1
Explosion-protected actuator Page 259 of 292
9.5 Explosion-protected actuator
9.5.1. What is an explosion?
A flammable substance and oxygen, in a certain mixture, must be available to set off an
explosion. With a suitable source of ignition it then leads to a chemical reaction. If the
reaction velocity exceeds the acoustic velocity, this is defined as an explosion.
The destructive effect of an explosion is the result of the sudden expansion of the built-up
flammable mixture in the form of a blast wave.
Three components are required to create an
explosion:
1. Fuel (flammable gas, flammable dusts, flammable
vapors)
2. Oxygen (in the air or as chemical compounds)
3. Ignition source (ignition sparks, hot surfaces, chemical
reactions)
9.5.2. What is explosion protection?
An explosion hazard can safely be prevented if one of the
three mentioned components are successfully eliminated on
site. Ignitable mixtures cannot be avoided at many
installations. Therefore the occurrence of an ignition source
must be prevented.
Electrical equipment is a potential ignition source, but also
non-electrical equipment may produce potential ignition
sources. Lost heat generates hot surfaces. Electrostatic
charges or transient currents can cause ignitable sparks.
Explosion-protection on electrical and mechanical
equipment signifes that the occurrence of high
temperatures at the surface and of ignitable sparks during
operation are prevented by constructional measures. For this reason, the equipment will
not be a potential ignition source.
9.5.3. ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
The Directive 94/9/EC is the European Directive for equipment in potentially explosive
atmospheres. It defnes the general protection objectives (protection of persons and
property).
One of the most signifcant differences to the previous regulation is that non-electrical
equipment has to be certifed for the use in potentially explosive atmospheres.
The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization CENELEC revised and
issued the technical guidelines for harmonizing the national standards on the basis of
the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC.
1
2
3
1
3
1
2
3
1
3
ATEX requirements for AUMA products
Electrical explosion protection Non-electrical explosion protection
Electric multi-turn actuators
Electric part-turn actuators
Multi-turn and part-turn actuator gearing
Worm gearboxes Spur and bevel
gearboxes Linear thrust units
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
EN 50014 EN 50020
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
EN 1127-1
EN 13463-1 et seqq.
Equipment group 2 for use in ZONE 1
Group IIC Temperature class T4
Equipment group 2 for use in ZONE 1
Group IIC Temperature class T4
Type examination certificate by a notified
body such as PTB, IBEXU, or DMT
Evaluation of the equipment by the
manufacturer themselves, ignition hazard
evaluation with reliability observation Risk
analysis Filing of the documentation with
a notified body.
Ex-audit by notified body -product quality
assurance
Declaration of Conformity/CE marking
Table 9.5.3.-1: ATEX requirements for AUMA products
9.5.4. Classification of potentially explosive atmospheres
Exact knowledge of the conditions under which the devices are to be operated is
important for the selection of the electrical equipment.
The description is designated by the following terms:
Zone/equipment category
Explosion group
Temperature class
9.5.5. Zone/equipment category
Potentially explosive areas are divided into zones according to the presence of
potentially explosive atmospheres.
The classification into equipment categories was introduced with the ATEX Directive
94/9/EC. It marks the equipment approved for the use in the respective zone.
Zones 0, 1, and 2 apply to explosive atmospheres consisting of gases and vapors;
zones 20, 21, and 22 apply to atmospheres containing a cloud of combustible dust in
air.
Zone 0, zone 20
Zone 0 or zone 20 are defined as zones, where an explosive atmosphere consisting
of gases and/or vapors or dust is present continuously or for long periods. In this
zone only category 1 equipment may be used.
Zone 1, zone 21
These are zones, where a dangerous, explosive atmosphere consisting of gases
and/or vapors or dust is likely to occur in normal operation. In this zone only
category 1 and 2 equipment may be used.
Zone 2, zone 22
These are zones, where a dangerous, explosive atmosphere consisting of gases
and/or vapors or dust is not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur,
will persist for a short period only. In this zone only category 1, 2 and 3 equipment
may be used.
Explosion-proof AUMA actuators and gearboxes correspond to equipment category II2G
or II2D and are therefore appropriate for use in zones 1 and 2 as well as 21 and 22.
Furthermore, various actuator types are suitable for use in group I, category M2 in mines.
9.5.6. Explosion group/temperature class
The gases are classified into explosion groups and temperature classes according to
their hazardous level.
The temperature class defines the permissible maximum surface temperature of the
equipment.
The explosion group divides the gases according to minimum ignition current and
maximum experimental safety gaps. Group I electrical equipment is for use in the mining
industry (underground). Group II devices are for applications in all other areas.
The hazard level of gases ranges from IIA to IIC. More than 90 % of explosive gases and
vapors are covered by explosion groups IIA and IIB.
Basically the following applies: Higher explosion groups and lower maximum permissible
surface temperatures require greater levels of design for electrical equipment.
Explosion groups
Temperature
classes
I IIA IIB IIC
T1
(450 C)
1)
Methane
Acetone,
Ethane,
Ammonia,
Benzol,
Acetic acid,
Methanol,
Propane,
Toluene, etc.
Town gas Hydrogen
T2
(300 C)
Thylalcohol,
n-Butane,
n-Butanol,
Dichloroethane,
etc.
Ethylene,
Ethylene
oxide
Acetylene
T3
(200 C)
Benzine,
Diesel fuel,
Aircraft fuel,
n-Hexane,
Fuel oil
T4
(135 C)
Ethanol Ethyl ether
T5
(100 C)
T6
(85 C)
Carbon-disulphide
1)
(max. permissible surface temperatures)
Table 9.5.6.-1: Explosion groups
9.5.7. How to achieve explosion protection?
There are different possibilities to qualify electrical equipment and non-electrical equipment
for the use in potentially explosive atmospheres. These measures are called protection
types. They are described in the European Standards EN 50014 et seqq. for electrical
equipment and EN 13463-1 et seqq. for non-electrical equipment.
Explosion-proof AUMA actuators are designed to protection types Increased safety
(EEx e) Flameproof enclosure (EEx d), and Constructional safety (c). The protection
type Constructional safety (c) applies to all AUMA valve gearboxes.
9.5.7.1 Increased safety (EEx e)
For the protection type Increased safety, measures are taken to increase protection
against the occurrence of ignition sparks, electric arcs, and of the possibility of excessive
temperatures. Special safety regulations for mounting electrical components must be
observed.
In an increased safety compartment, only explosion-proof components with their own test
certificate may be used.
For AUMA actuators, this protection type is used for example for the electrical connection.
All terminals are sized in such a way that no impermissible hot surfaces or sparks can
occur.
9.5.7.2 Flameproof enclosure (EEx d)
The protection type Flameproof enclosure allows an explosion inside the electrical
equipment. Flameproof joints of housing parts are designed in such a way that a flame
or burning particles cannot reach the outside. This is achieved by accurate sizing of the
gaps and widths of the flameproof joints. The housing is of a rigid design so that it can
withstand the pressure developing during an internal explosion without damage.
The following parts of AUMA actuators are designed with a flameproof enclosure:
Motor compartment
Switch compartment
Interior of integral controls AUMA MATIC and AUMATIC
L: Gap length, W: Gap width
9.5.7.3 Constructional safety (c)
This type of protection applies to non-electrical equipment or non-electrical parts of
electrical equipment. It was introduced within the framework of the ATEX Directive 94/9/
EC, which for the first time requires the examination of non-electrical equipment.
In the European Standard EN 13463-5, this protection type is described as follows:"a
type of ignition protection in which constructional measures are applied so as to protect
against the possibility of ignition from hot surfaces, sparks and adiabatic compression
generated by moving parts."
Even before the ATEX Directive came into force, non-electrical equipment was used
in potentially explosive atmospheres. By testing this equipment in compliance with the
requirements of the constructional safety, it can often be certified for use in potentially
explosives atmospheres without any problems or only with minor modification.
AUMA valve gearboxes and the gearing section of the actuators meet the requirements
of the Constructional safety.
9.5.7.4 Who tests what?
Electrical equipment
The conformity assessment of the electrical equipment for equipment categories 1 and
2 has to be performed by notified European bodies. AUMA actuators are mainly tested
and approved by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB) in Braunschweig,
Germany.
In addition to the assessment of the explosion protection measures for the electrical
equipment, the in-house quality assurance and production are regularly audited by the
PTB.
AUMA explosion-proof devices are subjected to a 100 % test, i.e. a pressure test and a
dimension test of the explosion- proof components are performed.
Non-electrical equipment
The assessment of the non-electrical equipment regarding their conformity for their use
in potentially explosive zone 1 and 2 atmospheres (equipment categories 2 and 3) is
incumbent upon the manufacturer. The documentation drawn up during the qualification
stage, such as test reports, have to be deposited at a notified body.
Due to AUMAs many years of experience in the field of explosion protection, the
necessary expertise to reliably test and certify the non-electrical explosion protection of
the AUMA equipment is readily available. The documentation is filed with the Physikalisch-
Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB) in Braunschweig, Germany.
Handling explosion-proof electrical equipment - AUMA Service
Installation, commissioning, maintenance, repairs, and modification work must, according
to EN 60-17, only be performed by qualified personnel with extensive knowledge on how
to handle explosion-proof equipment. Explosion-proof equipment must be maintained
regularly (at least every 3 years).
AUMA service engineers are the specialists in the field of AUMA actuators. They ensure
that the required tasks are performed in compliance with the safety requirements.
Inspections and maintenance work can be scheduled on a long-term basis by signing
maintenance contracts with the AUMA service department.
9.5.7.5 Auma Marking
All essential information, from the explosion group to the type of protection and the number
of the EC-type-examination certificate, must be included in the equipment marking.
In addition to the name plate, an approval plate is fixed to the actuator. This contains all
information regarding the explosion protection.
Marking
2
1
3 4
1 Approved mark of the applicable
standard here: CENELEC
(responsible for the EU)
2 Explosion protection classification -
electrical explosion protection
3 Number of the EC-Type-
examination certificate starts with
the abbreviation of the notified body
here PTB (Physikalisch-Technische
Bundesanstalt)
4 Explosion protection classification -
non-electrical explosion protection
a
b d f h
c e g
a Equipment group (mining industry I,
other areas II)
b Category 2 (for zone I)
c Medium (G = Gas or D = Dust)
d Area of standards application
(E for European Standard)
e Explosion-protected electrical
equipment
f Protection types
(here flameproof enclosure and
increased safety)
g Explosion group
h Temperature class
a b c
a see above
b Protection type (here constructional
safety)
c see above
Figure 9.5.7.5.-1: Marking
9.5.7.6 Electric actuators and non-electrical explosion protection
What has an electric actuator got to do with non-electrical explosion protection? In simple
terms, an actuator can be divided into an electrical part - motor, electrical connection, and
sensor system - and a non-electrical (gearing) part.
To provide complete explosion protection, the equipment has been checked according to
the requirements for both the electrical and the non-electrical explosion protection.
The electrical explosion protection features were certified by the Physikalisch-Technische
Bundesanstalt (PTB) in Braunschweig, Germany, the examination according to the
requirements of the non-electrical explosion protection was performed in accordance with
AUMA standards.
1
2 3 4
5
Figure 9.5.7.6.-1: Electric actuators and non-electrical explosion protection
Blue non-electrical part of the actuator Type of protection: Constructional safety
1 Handwheel for emergency operation
2 Gear housing with worm gearing and hollow output shaft
Red electrical part of the actuator
Type of protection: Flameproof enclosure and increased safety
3 Motor coupling
4 Motor
5 Electrical connection with switch compartment inside
AUMA has an extensive range of explosion-proof actuators. Multi-turn, part-turn, and
linear actuators with a wide torque and thrust spectrum allow solutions for nearly every
valve automation task.
Combinations
In addition to the electric actuators for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, the AUMA
product range includes various valve gearboxes for multi-turn and part-turn movement.
When combining them with the multi-turn actuators, the available torque range is extended.
Certificates outside the European Union
Certificates of Conformity issued from national test authorities in other countries, e.g.
USA, Canada, CIS, Brazil, Japan, India, etc., are also available.
Further information regarding the devices
Further brochures describing the scope of performance plus technical data sheets are
available on request.
Auma Multi-turn actuators e.g. for gate valves and globe valves
Multi-turn actuators
SAExC 07.1 SAExC 16.1
SARExC 07.1 SARExC 16.1
in version AUMA NORM 1
torque between 10 and 1 000 Nm
speed between 4 and 180 rms
II2G EEx de IIC T4
II2G c IIC T4
II2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T130C
up to size 10.1 additionally
I M2 Ex de I
Combinations
Multi-turn actuator/linear thrust unit
SAExC/LE
thrusts as from
4 kN 217 kN
travels up to 500 mm
running speeds between
20 mm/min and 360 mm/min
II2G EEx de IIC T4
II2G c IIC T4
Auma Multi-turn actuators e.g. for gate valves and globe valves
Multi-turn actuators
SAEx 25.1 SAEx 40.1
torque between 630 and 16 000 Nm
speed between 4 and 90 rms
II2G EEx ed IIB T4
II2G c IIB T4
Combinations multi-turn actuator/spur
gearboxes SA(R)ExC/GST
torque up to 16,000 Nm
II2G EEx de IIC T4
II2G c IIC T4
Combinations multi-turn actuator/spur
gearboxes SA(R)ExC/GK
torque up to 16,000 Nm
II2G EEx de IIC T4
II2G c IIC T4
Actuators with fireproof housing
Certain applications in the oil and gas industry
require fireproof actuators to close the valve within
a defined time span in case of fire.
AUMA offers the electric multi-turn actuators
SAExC and part-turn actuators SGExC in a
fireproof version.
A special coating ensures full functionality of the
actuators for at least 30 minutes if exposed to a
temperature of up to 1,100 C.
Figure 9.5.7.-7: Multi-turn actuators e.g. for gate valves and globe valves
9.5.8. Explosion-protected actuator
Explosion proof
Type ExRun (Yellow)
Type RedRun
Nominal thrust: 500 to 10,000 N
Rated travel: 5 to 60 mm
Control mode: On-off, Three-point stepping and
modulating
9.5.8.1 Explosion-protected actuator from Company SCHISCHEK
The explosion-proof actuators from SCHISCHEK
1)
, Germany are tested and approved for
the use in hazardous area.
The new Type ExRun valve actuators are a revolution for safety, control valve and other
motorized applications for HVAC systems, in Chemical, Pharmaceutical, Industrial and
Offshore-/Onshore plants, for use in Ex-areas zone 1, 2 (Gas) and zone 21, 22 (Dust).
Highest protection class (ATEX) and IP 66 protection, small dimensions, only 7 kg weight,
universal functions and technical data, an integrated heater guarantee safe operation
even under difficult environmental conditions.
High quality brush less motors guarantee long life. All actuators are programmable and
adjustable on site. Special tools or equipment are not required. Five motor running times
and two forces, according to the actuator Type, are selectable or adjustable on site. The
integrated universal power supply is self adaptable to input voltages in the range of 24 to
230 V AC / DC.
The actuators are 100% overload protected and self locking. The modular concept offers
the possibility to mount adjustable end switches, potentiometers, and additional equiped
with an analog output 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA for signalization.
Explosion proof linear actuators Type ExRun and RedRun
ExRun RedRun
Explosion proof zone 1, 2, 21, 22
Gas + Dust, PTB-certified,
II 2(1) G Ex de [ia] IIC T6,
II 2(1) D Ex tD [iaD] A21 IP66 T80
ATEX 94/9/EC
Explosion proof zone 2, 22
Gas + Dust, PTB-certified
II 3(1) G Ex nC [ia] IIC T6,
II 3 G Ex nC II T6,
II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP66 T80,
II 3(1) D Ex tD [iaD] A22 IP66 T80,
ATEX 94/9/EC
1)
http://www.schischek.com
Explosion proof linear actuators Type ExRun and RedRun
Description Delivery
Type ExRun and Type RedRun Valve
actuators are used for automation of
Globe valves 2- and 3-way with control
mode for:
On-off
Modulating
Actuator with integrated Ex-e terminal box,
Emergency manual override.
Basics for ExRun and RedRun valve actuators
24 to 240 V AC/DC self adaptable power supply
Up to 5 different running times adjustable on site
5 to 60 mm stroke, mechanical limitation on each position
Automatic adaptation of modulating signal at Type ExRun, RedRun
Aluminium housing IP66, integrated terminal box
-20 to +40C/+50C, integrated heater
Emergency manual override
Dimension (H*x W x D) 260 x 208 x 115 mm (Dimension without adaptation)
*Height = variable, depending on Type.
Ambient
temperature
-20 to + 40C at T6 / -20 to + 50C at T5
Ambient
temperature -30 C
-30 to + 40C at T6 / -30 to + 50C at T5 - limited force approx.
60% of the nominal value, e.g. 5 kN = 3 kN (max), Icing is not
Humidity 0 to 95 % rH non condensing
Motor Brush less DC Motor
Supply voltage,
Frequency
24 to 230 V AC/DC + 15/- 20 %, 50 to 60 Hz 20 %
Operation mode S3/50 % ED = duty cycle (max. 600 operating cycles / h)
Power consumption Max. 20 W (in acc. with voltage, I Start >> I rated)
Heater consumption Approx. 16 W, (motor is not running in this moment)
Cable gland M20 1.5 II2GD Ex-e approved, Gable diameter 0.6 to 13 mm
Manual override
Change from auto to hand mode with sidewise (red) switch and
turn with the all en key top side
Necessary
accessories:
Valve adaptation in acc. with valve manufacturer, Type and
nominal size (diameter).
Table 9.5.8.1.-1: Technical data of Type ExRun and Type RedRun Valve actuators
9.5.8.2 Accessories and special designs (additional price)
Type ExRun
Type RedRun
Aluminium housing with Amercoat painting, resistant against
corrosive and/or maritime atmosphere, some parts nickel plated
ExSwitch
2 external, adaptable, on site adjustable Ex-aux. switches with 2
potentail free contacts, additionally Ex-e terminal box + mounting
bracket necessary
RedSwitch
2 external, adaptable, on site adjustable Ex-aux. switches with 2
potentail free contacts, additionally Ex-e terminal box + mounting
bracket necessary
InSwitch
2 external, adaptable, on site adjustable switches with 2 potentail free
contacts, additionally terminal box+ mounting bracket necessary
ExBox-SW
Ex-e terminal box suitable for ExRun to valve-actuators with external
switches ExSwitch
RedBox-SW
Ex-e terminal box suitable for RedRun to valve-actuators with
external switches RedSwitch
InBox-SW
Terminal box suitable for InRun to valve-actuators which external
switches InSwitch
MKK-S
Mounting-bracket suitable for to Box-terminal boxes for direct
mounting on to Run actuators size S`
HV-R Manual override suitable for to Run valve actuators size S`
Adaptation
Different adaptations for different valve types and sizes available.
Please don't hesitate to ask for technical solution
GMB-1 Rubber bellow up to 60 mm, color black
Table 9.5.8.2.-1: Accessories and special designs
Mounting of to ..Switch
Figure 9.5.8.2.-2: Mounting of Switch
9.5.8.3 Ex-d valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Type ExRun
Type
Force
N
Running time
sec/mm
Control mode Feedback Features
ExRun- 5.10-X 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
ExSwitch not
adaptable
ExRun- 25.50-X 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
ExSwitch not
adaptable
RedRun- 75.100-X
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
4/6/9/12/15 On-off, Three-point
ExSwitch not
adaptable
RedRun- 5.10 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
ExRun- 25.50 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
ExRun- 75.100
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
ExRun- 5.10-S 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
2 aux.
switch, fixed
switching
points
1)
ExRun- 25.50-S 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
2 aux.
switch, fixed
switching
points
1)
ExRun- 75.100-S
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
2 aux.
switch, fixed
switching
points
1)
ExRun- 5.10-P 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12
On-off,
Three-point,
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1.000
ExRun- 25.50-P 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12
On-off,
Three-point,
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1.000
ExRun- 75.100-P
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
4/6/9/12/15
On-off,
Three-point,
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1.000
ExRun- 5.10-Y 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
ExRun- 25.50-Y 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
ExRun- 75.100-Y
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
4/6/9/12/15
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
ExRun- 5.10-U 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
ExRun- 25.50-U 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
ExRun- 75.100-U
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
Table 9.5.8.3.-1: Ex-d valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Type ExRun
1)
Switching points are fix! (See table)
9.5.8.4 Ex-n valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Type RedRun
Type
Force
N
Running time
sec/mm
Control mode Feedback Features
RedRun- 5.10-X 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
ExSwitch not
adaptable
RedRun- 25.50-X 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
ExSwitch not
adaptable
RedRun- 75.100-X
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
ExSwitch not
adaptable
RedRun- 5.10 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
RedRun- 25.50 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
RedRun- 75.100
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
RedRun- 5.10-S 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
2 aux.
switch, fixed
switching
points
1)
RedRun- 25.50-S 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
2 aux.
switch, fixed
switching
points
1)
RedRun- 75.100-S
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
2 aux.
switch, fixed
switching
points
1)
RedRun- 5.10-P 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12
On-off,
Three-point,
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1.000
RedRun- 25.50-P 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12
On-off,
Three-point,
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1.000
RedRun- 75.100-P
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
4/6/9/12/15
On-off,
Three-point,
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1.000
RedRun- 5.10-Y 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
RedRun- 25.50-Y 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
RedRun- 75.100-Y
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
4/6/9/12/15
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
RedRun- 5.10-U 500 / 11,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
RedRun- 25.50-U 2,500 / 15,000 2/3/6/9/12 On-off, Three-point
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
RedRun- 75.100-U
7,500 / 10,000
(8,000)
0 to 10 V DC,
4 to 20 mA
Table 9.5.8.4.-1: Ex-n valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Type RedRun
1)
Switching points are fix! (See table)
ExRun and RedRun
Valve adaption
To select the right valve adaptation and
get the right price information the following
data are required:
Valve manufacturer
Valve Type
Valve nominal size (diameter) DN/NPS
For adaptations which are still designed
by Schischek this data are minimum
requirements.
To design new adaptations we need
additional details of the valve body as well
as drawings.
At purchase order you have to order both
parts actuator + adaptation.
Type ExRun- to .
Type RedRun- to .
Adaption
Hazardous Locations
Supply
24 to 230 V AC/DC
Version ExRun- ...-S
Limit switches 24 V / 1 A 230 V / 0.25 A
Version ExRun- ...-P
Potentiometer 0 to 1000
Version ExRun-...-U
Feedback 0 to 10 V / 4 to 20 mA
Hazardous locations
Zone 1, 2, 21, and 22
Safe area
Figure 9.5.8.4.-2: Valve adaption and hazaedous locations
9.5.8.5 Wiring diagram of Type ExRun
On-off and Three-point stepping
Internal switches
Figure 9.5.8.5.-1: A) Wiring diagrams of Type ExRun
Wiring diagram of Type ExRun
Potentiometer
Feedback signal V / mA
Table 9.5.8.5.-2: B) Wiring diagrams of Type ExRun
9.5.9. Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve with explosion-proof electric actuator
Type: RedRun-5.10-Y (Standard 7031-2959129)
Explosion protection: PTB 09 ATEX 1016X II2 D Ex tD (iaD) A21 Zone 21 and 22
Power supply: 24 to 230 V AC/DC universal supply unit, self-adapting
Travel:
7.5 mm for micro-flow valve
(adjustable between 5 and 60 mm)
Nominal force: 500 to 1000 N (adjustable)
Motor running time: 2/3/6/9/12 seconds/mm (adjustable)
Spring return: None
Control mode: 0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA (adjustable)
Feedback: 0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA (adjustable)
Ambient temperature: 20 C to +40 C / 50 C
Degree of protection: IP 66
Manual override: Integrated
Attachment: Directly onto Type 3510
On request:
Three-step, offshore coating, rubber bellows, external
auxiliary
Technical data of actuator:
SAMSON receives the actuator from SCHISCHEK ready for connection.
Preferably, the actuator is to be mounted in the upright position. Otherwise, suitable
supports must be fitted to the actuator if it is mounted in a different position.
If the actuator is installed outdoors, the following points must be observed: Actuator
must be fitted with built-in heating and a protective roof (to protect the actuator from
direct sunshine/ snow) must be provided on site.
Further information available at http://www.schischek.com
Figure 9.5.9.-1: Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve with explosion-proof electric actuator
Hydraulic with a linear movement Page 279 of 292
9.6 Hydraulic with a linear movement
Hydraulic actuators or hydraulic cylinders typically involve a hollow cylinder having a
piston inserted in it. The two sides of the piston are alternately pressurized/de-pressurized
to achieve controlled precise linear displacement of the piston and in turn the entity
connected to the piston. The physical linear displacement is only along the axis of the
piston/cylinder. This design is based on the principles of hydraulics. A familiar example of
a manually operated hydraulic actuator is a hydraulic car jack. Typically though, the term
"hydraulic actuator" refers to a device controlled by a hydraulic pump.
Piston Forces
p
e
Extending
A
1
F
1
p
e
Retracting
F
2
A
2
d
1
d
2
Example:
What are the effecitive piston forces?
Hydraulic cylinder with d
1
= 100 mm, d
2
= 70 mm, = 0.85 and p
e
= 60 bar.
Extending
( )

= = =
2
1 e 1 2
10cm
N
F p A 600 0.85
cm 4
40,065 N
Retracting
( ) ( )

= = =
2 2
2 e 2 2
10cm 7cm
N
F p A 600 0.85
cm 4
20, 428 N
p
e
= Gage pressure
A
1
, A
2
= Piston areas
F
1
= Piston force when extending
F
2
= Piston force when retracting
d
1
= Piston diameter
d
2
= Piston rod diameter
= Efficiency
F = p
e
A
2
N
1bar =10
cm
9.6.1. Hydraulic Scotch Yoke Valve Actuators
Hydraulic ranges
Hydraulic ranges actuators are designed to provide a rotary, quarter-turn movement
for either on/off or modulating duty. The robust design incorporates double sealing for
superior environmental protection and features a one-piece ductile iron cast centre body.
Hydraulic torque output up to 95,425 lbf-in (10,780 Nm).
Steel and ductile iron construction.
Inherently safe, factory welded spring-return module.
Exclusive Rotork double O ring sealing for proven protection against leakage in oil-
filled service.
Special build available for nuclear power plant safety related valve applications class
1E, in standard IEEE323.
AWWA C540 compliant build available.
Figure 9.6.1.-1: Hydraulic Scotch Yoke Valve Actuators (Photo: Rotork)
9.6.1.1 Reliability by Design
Hydraulic range scotch yoke actuators are designed to operate ball, butterfly and plug
valves requiring a quarter-turn movement for either on/off or modulating duty applications.
Sharing a versatile, modular, construction and many components; they are available
in both double-acting and spring-return configurations. The robust design incorporates
double sealing for superior environmental protection and features a one-piece ductile iron
cast centre body to maintain correct bearing alignment. The centre body is available in
two sizes. A pneumatic cylinder can be attached to either or both sides. A spring canister
can also be fitted to either side for Emergency Shut Down (ESD) applications.
Modular construction and stocking of components by Rotork Fluid Systems' Centres of
Excellence and a worldwide network of distributors facilitates quick delivery times.
9.6.1.2 Safety by Design
Hydraulic range actuators have been designed to be inherently safe. The springs are
contained within a factory welded spring canister with a unique and patented fastening
arrangement that ensures user safety when removing the canister.
The pneumatic cylinder features tie rods specially designed for excessive pressure relief
and the centre body is equipped with a pressure relief valve for further operational safety.
9.6.1.3 High Performance by Design
Superior design features enable a much longer service life than competitive products.
Hydraulic range actuators are capable of a least 200,000 cycles under full load. Units in
the field with more typical loads may achieve several times that.
Operating Pressure: Pneumatic up to 250 psi (17 bar)
Hydraulic up to 3,000 psi (207 bar)
Torque Output: Pneumatic up to 88,000 lbf-in (9,942 Nm)
Hydraulic up to 95,425 lbf-in (10,780 Nm)
Temperature Ranges:
Standard: -10F to 200F (-23C to 93C)
High: -15F to 325F (-26C to 162C)
Low: -40F to 200F (-40C to 93C)
Extreme Low: -60F to 200F (-51C to 93C)
9.6.1.4 Override Options
A dependable manual override facility is an important part of many valve/actuator
applications. Rotork Fluid Systems has a variety of override options to meet virtually any
requirement. Available options include handwheel jackscrew, hydraulic hand pump and
gearbox solutions.
9.6.1.5 Key Design Features
Rated life of 200,000 cyclestested against a full load over the entire output stroke.
Robust steel and ductile iron construction.
Single piston rod electroless nickel-plated for corrosion-free durability, lubricity and
long life of bearings and crown seals.
External tie-rods an pneumatic piston cylinder specially designed for excessive
pressure relief to ensure operational safety.
Long life, aluminum bronze friction slipper with low backlash delivers excellent
performance for heavy-duty modulating.
Integral piston rod support ensures long piston, rod and bearing life by maintaining
perfect alignment under all load conditions.
Inherently safe, factory welded spring-return module with unique safety fastening (US
Patent No. 4 350 08) ensures containment of spring forces when module is removed.
Double O-ring sealing for proven protection against leakage in oil-filled service.
Phosphate and molybdenum disulphide coated torque plug bearings combined with
weather protection seals for maximum environmental protection.
Figure 9.6.1.5.-1: (Photo: Rotork)
9.6.1.6 VETEC Rotary valve with Pleiger hydraulic actuator
The Pleiger
1
EHS- System is constructed
as a de-centralized system offering an
alternative to the conventional system.
Each EHS forms a self-contained unit.
The connections between actuators
and the control system are exclusively
electrical.
It combines the advantages of the
hydraulic system and the electrical unit
perfectly and reduces procuring and
assembling time.
Highlights
Small size high torque
P 67, IP 68 on request
Contact free limit switches
Position indicator
Small oil capacity
Low noise level
ATEX, optinal
Bus Interface, optional
Submersible, optional
Energy efficient, cost saving
Figure 9.6.1.6.-1: Rotary valve with PLEIGER hydraulic actuator (Photo: VETEC)
1 http://www.pleiger.de
9.6.2. Hydraulic- actuating systems of Welland & Tuxhorn AG
Welland & Tuxhorn AG is a specialist for Steam conversion and Bypass technology and
manufactures own hydraulic-actuating systems.
Figure 9.6.2.-1: Welland & Tuxhorn - Hydraulic actuating system Type NBF 400
Figure 9.6.2.-2: Welland & Tuxhorn - Steam pressure check device.
Steam testing unit for safety steam reducing control valves (HD-Bypass Stations)
Hydraulic
Actuator
Figure 9.6.2.-3: Control valves for water and steam Type RVG with Hydraulic Actuator
9.6.2.1 Functions
Secure positioning of main control valves in control circuits of power stations and all other
types of technical processing facilities. Solutions for complex control and regulation tasks;
also with the assistance of compact form Profibus connectors.
Integration of safety functions such as turbine, boiler or condenser protection. Provision
of emergency strokes during auxiliary energy malfunctions.
Advantages
Easy to regulate
Very high operating force
Very high rigidity
High operating-velocity
Prototype tested and approved according to TRD 421
Safe positioning with cup springs
Variable configuration due to modular construction methods
Double-acting cylinders
9.6.2.2 Design
The hydraulic power array consists of a drive assembly (see Figure 9.6.2.-1); the servo
valve serves as actuating element and the cylinder as drive element
for the control valve (see Figure 9.6.2.-3.
Generally, the input of the set point value follows as an analogue
electrical signal, and can originate from several sources.
The actual value of the controlled variable is read by the measurement
device and is then also converted into an analogue signal.
The actual value comparison follows in the measuring device.
This means that the control difference is arrived at.
This is then amplified, assigned a particular transmission behavior
(PID behavior) and added as control variable to the servo valve.
The amplifier to the servo valve is located between the controller
and the servo valve.
This interface converts the control variable current into magnetic
current, and also contains the position regulatory system of the
servo valve.
9.6.2.3 Setup of an electro-hydraulic Control Loop
(See Figure 9.6.2.3.-1)
The hydraulic power line consists of the
actuator, the servo-valve (as the positioner),
and the hydraulic motor or cylinder used as
final controlling element.
The input of the setpoint generally is in
form of an analog electric Signal which can
originate from different sources. Frequently
these sources can be potentiometers, function
generators, numeric controls or signals which
come from other machine actuating systems.
The actual value of the controlled variable is
acquired by the measuring system and is also converted
to an analog signal. The comparison between setpoint and actual value is carried out in
the electronic control amplifier, i.e. the system deviation is calculated.
This deviation is amplified, is provided with a specified response characteristic (PID-
characteristics) and is provided to the servo-valve as the manipulated variable.
A power amplifier of the servo-valve is located between the controller and the valve. This
interface converts the voltage of the manipulated variable into a magnetic current and
contains the position control systems of the servo valve.
Hydraulic
Actuator
Figure 9.6.2.3.-1: Hydraulic power loop of an control valve
Hydraulic Positioning Systems
NBF 160 for 1 Valve
NBF 250 for 2 to 4 Valves
Table 9.6.2.3.-2: Hydraulic Positioning Systems
Advantages
Box-type design Multi-function blocks in modular setup
Compact installation
Reduction of costs for piping and joints
Reduction of installation costs due to the simple exchange of function blocks
Oil tank with integrated oil sump acc. to DIN 24339
Level and temperature monitoring devices
Double stroke hand pump
High pressure double switching filter
Hydraulic storage facility used as supply and acceleration storage facility
Motor pumps each with 100% delivery rate
Electronic pressure switch with digital display
Hydraulic cylinder (balanced type) with or without safety cupspring assembly
Large alarm unit with mechanical switches and an electronic position transmitter
(0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA)
Electronic cubicle with programmable controllers type SIMATIC S7
Figure 9.6.2.3.-3: HYDRAULIC SERVO SYSTEMS TYPE "NBF" 160, 250, 400, 630
for Control Valves Safety Functions acc. to TV. SV. 92-886
9.6.2.4 Hydraulic Servo-Systems - Establishment and Manufacturing
For conventional and nuclear power stations, or for industrial facilities: Welland & Tuxhorn
delivers suitable control fittings from level control to injection and safety valves.
By constantly sharing and exchanging Know How with renowned power station planners
and operators, as well as with technical and scientific institutions, we have gained
experience in theory and practice. This experience has been converted into better and
better products.
Specific solutions, innovative solutions, fulfilling the highest technical requirements.
Special considerations concerning spatial and constructional conditions mostly demand
sound and expert compromises. Use our experience, and let our engineers and technicians
advise you.
The common goal is to find the best-possible solution together!
Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7 Page 289 of 292
9.7 Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7
Data Sheet for Control Valves ( - Minimum details for the selection and the sizing of one valve)
1
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

d
a
t
a
Site of control
2 Measuring and control task
7
8 Pipe material
12 Process medium
13 State at the input - liquid - steam - vapor
unit
16 Flow rate
17 Input pressure p
1
18 Output pressure p
2
19 Temperature T1
20 Input density p1 or M
21 Steam pressure P
v
22 Critical pressure P
c
23 Kinematic viscosity v
31 Calculation of max. flow rate coefficient K
v
32 Calculation of min. flow rate coefficient K
v
33 Selected flow rate coefficient K
vs
34 Calculated sound pressure level
35
V
a
l
v
e

b
o
d
y
Control Valve Type
36 Style
38
39
40 Type of connection - flange - welding end - welded-neck end - DIN/ - ANSI
43 Bonnet shape - standard - insulating section bellows seal - heating jacket
45 Body/bonnet material
47 Characteristic - linear - equal percentage
48 Plug/stem material
49 Bushing/seat material
52 Hard facing - none - partly stellited - purely stellited - hardened
54
55 Packing material - standard - type
57
A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Actuator type - pneumatic
60
62
63 Bench range
64 Fail-safe action - closed - open - stop
66 Other operating mode - electric - electrohydraulic - hand-operated
67 Fail-safe action with three-way valve
68 Additional manual operation - no - yes
70
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r
Positioner Type
71 Input signal - pneumatic - electric
72
73
76
78 Explosion protection - EExi - Exd
80
L
i
m
i
t

s
w
i
t
c
h
Limit switch Type
81 Limit switch - electric - inductive - pneumatic
82 Switching position - closed - % travel - open
83 Switching function - closing - opening
84 Explosion protection - EExi - EExd
86
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

v
a
l
v
e

Solenoid valve Type
87 Style - 2-way - 3-way
88 If power fails, valve should - open - close - stop
91
Nominal pressure PN
Nominal size DN ...
...
Effective area
... cm
2
Leckage class ... % K
vs class
Pipeline
min. standard max.
DN ... PN ... Class ...
Control valve opened at
Control valve closed at
Air connection max.
... bar
... bar
... bar
... mA
... mA
Electric data ... V ... Hz ... W
Supply air pressure min. max.
... dB(A)
15
Table 9.7.-1: Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7
9.8 Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1
Proj f o t e e h S a t a D t c e
e t a D t i n U
S . O . P pec
a T m e t I g
w D t c a r t n o C g
Mf e c i v r e S * l a i r e S r
1 Fluid
F n i M s t i n U low
2 Flow Rate
3 Inlet Pressure
4 Outlet Pressure
5
6
7
8 Vapor Pressure Pv
9
10 * Travel %
11 Allowable/*Predicted SPL ) A ( B d
12
3 5 In ype
4 5 Out e l u d e h c S & 14 * Mfr & Model
15 Pipeline Insulation 55 a e r A f f E e z i S *
56 n i t a l u d o M f f O / n O g
16 ype 57 Spring Action Open/ Close
17 * Size ANSI Class
58 * Max Allowable Pressure
18 Max Press/Temp 59 * Min Required Pressure
19 * Mfr & Model 60
20 * Body/Bonnet Matl 61
21 * Liner Matl/ID 62 *
3 6 2 2 Act Orientation
4 6 3 2 Handwheel Type
5 6 4 2
25 End Ext/Matl 66
26 * Flow Direction 67
27
28 68 ype
29 * Packing Material 69 * Mfr & Model
30 * Packing Type 70 *
1 7 1 3 Gaug B s e ypass
72 * Cam Characteristic
3 7 2 3
33 * Size Rated Travel
4 7 4 3 Typ Quantity e
35 * Balanced/Unbalanced 75 * Mfr & Model
36 * Rate FL XT 76 Contacts/Rating
37 * Plug/Ball/Disk Material 77 Actuation Points
38 * Seat Material 78
39
40 * Stem Material 79 fr & Model
0 8 1 4 * Set Pressure
1 8 2 4 Filter Gauges
82
43 Group Div.
3 8 4 4 ydrostatic Pressure
4 8 5 4 ANSI/FCI Leakage Class
5 8 6 4
6 8 7 4
48
49
50
51
52
Date
End In
Connection Out
Available Instr. Air Max
Supply Pressure
E
C
I
V
R
E
S
S
N
O
I
T
I
D
N
O
C
A
C
T
U
A
T
O
R
E
N
I
L
V
L
A
V
T
E
N
N
O
B
/
Y
D
O
B
E
O
I
T
I
S
O
P
R
E
N
R
I
M
T
T
I
W
S
S
E
H
C
Rev
S
P
E
C
I
A
L
S

/
A
C
C
E
S
S
O
R
I
E
S
T
E
S
R
I
A
S
T
S
E
T
NEC Class
Norm Flow
On Increasing Signal Output Incr/Decr
Crit Press Pc
App
0
* Required Cv
* T
* Type of Bonnet
* Type
* Characteristic
* Cage/Guide Material
* Information supplied by manufacturer unless already specifed.
* T
* T
* M
* H
Bench Range
Flg Face Finish
f f O - t u h S w o l F x a M
Set at Air Fails Valve
Revision Orig
Lube Lub & Iso Valve
13 Pipe Line Size
C
v
Viscosity / Spec Heat Ratio
Density / Spec Grav / Mol Wt
Inlet Temperature
Input signal
Min
Table 9.8.-1: Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1
Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1 Page 291 of 292

Control Valve Actuators

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Control Valve Actuators

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SAMSON AG MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK Weismllerstrae 3 60314 Frankfurt am Main Germany

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement Page 005 of 292

Signal pressure - opening diagram ATC (Closed with air pressure).

Opening safety factor:

Open safety factor:

in case of pressure balance is nearly negligible

in case of pressure balance is nearly negligible

Member of SAMSON Group

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen